Permit 100 Royal Palm Dr (vault) (2) STEPHEN MCCULLAR ARCHITECTS, P.A.
1543 KINGSLEY AVENUE,BLDG. 15,ORANGE PARK,FLORIDA 32073
(904)264-3433 FL: AA0003145 FAX: (904)264-8462
PROJECT MANUAL
AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR
, iL ,
ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS FOR
MICHAEL W. DUKES D.M.D.
ATLANTIC BEACH, FLORIDA
0-668 sro1
an
C-668
' SECTION 00001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
' 00000 Specification Cover
00001 Table of Contents
00020 Invitation To Bid
00300 Bid Proposal Form
00700 AIA General Conditions
00800 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01020 Allowances
01060 Codes, Permits, Fees
01070 Cutting And Patching
01200 Job Site Administration
01300 Submittals
01500 Temporary Facilities
01620 Materials, Storage And Protection
01700 Project Close-out
01710 Cleaning
01720 Project Record Documents
01730 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02230 Paving Base Course
M° 02510 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
02525 Curbs and Sidewalks
02580 Pavement Markings
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100 Mortar
04150 Masonry Accessories
04220 Concrete Masonry Units
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel
05440 Light-Gauge Steel Framing
DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY
01
ti
00001-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
06100 Rough Carpentry
06192 Prefabricated Wood Trusses
06200 Finish Carpentry
06420 Plastic Laminate Casework
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07193 Plastic Vapor Barrier
07210 Glass Fiber Insulation
07212 Rigid Insulation
07465 Prefinished Vinyl Siding, Fascia and Soffits •f►
07535 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Over Metal Decking
07610 Standing Seam Roof
07660 Fiber-Cement Siding and Accessories
07921 Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS,WINDOWS AND TRIM
08100 Steel Doors And Frames
08214 Solid Core Masonite Faced Dimensional Doors
08520 Aluminum Windows
08668 Aluminum Stone Shutters
08710 Finish Hardware
08820 Architectural Stile and Rail Doors
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09224 Portland Cement Stucco
09260 Gypsum Wall Board
09320 Ceramic Floor Tile, Thin Set
09500 Acoustical Ceilings
09650 Wall Base �^
09660 Resilient Tile Flooring
09680 Carpet
09900 Painting
09950 Vinyl Wallcovering
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
10800 Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not Required
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Required
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Required
00001-2 Rev. 6/01
mss;
C-668
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15001 General Mechanical Requirements
15002 General Plumbing Requirements
" 15003 Firestopping
15075 Mechanical Identification
15140 Pipe Hangers and Supports
15145 Plumbing Piping
15146 Plumbing Specialties
15214 Medical Gas Systems
15410 Plumbing Fixtures
15430 Plumbing Equipment
15735 Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units
15810 Ducts
15820 Duct Accessories
15835 Power Ventilators
15850 Air Outlets and Inlets
15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 General Electrical Requirements
16060 Grounding and Bonding
16070 Hangers and Supports
16075 Electrical Identification
16123 Building Wire and Cable
16131 Conduit
16138 Boxes
16140 Wiring Devices
16155 Equipment Wiring
16411 Enclosed Circuit Breakers
16412 Enclosed Switches
16443 Panelboards
16491 Fuses
16510 Interior Luminaries
16520 Exterior Luminaries
16721 Telephone Service, Pathways, and Wiring
END OF SECTION 00001
00001-3 Rev. 6/01
*�
.�
..,
*�
..
:.�
,.a
C-668
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 LOCATION AND TIME:
Sealed bids will be received on Wednesday,August 1, 2001 until 2:00 p.m., local time, by
the Architect, at the following address:
Stephen C. McCullar, Architect
1543 Kingsley Avenue, Building 15
Orange Park, Florida 32073
For the furnishing of labor and materials for the construction of:
Additions and Alterations for
Michael W. Dukes, D.M.D.
Atlantic Beach, Florida
Description:
Completion: Substantial Completion by 90 days from Notice to Proceed
1.2 PRE-BID CONFERENCE: Will be scheduled by the Architect.
1.3 BID OPENING:
A. Bids will be opened privately by the Owner. Bidders will be notified of the bidding order
and will be provided a bid tabulation by mail or fax upon request by Bidders and with
approval of the Owner.
+• 1.4 BID SUBMITTAL:
A. All Bids must be made on the Bid Proposal Form included. Execute Bids in
accordance with the Instructions to Bidders: place bid with attachments in a sealed
envelope which shall be marked 'BID FOR MICHAEL W. DUKES, D.M.D.", and
delivered to the location indicated in Section 1.1 above.
1.5 BID REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE:
A. Each Bid Proposal shall remain firm and binding for at least sixty (60) days to allow
time for the Owner's evaluation of Bids.
00020-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids and to reject Bids not
accompanied by any required Bid Security or other date required by Bid Documents,
or to reject Bids which are in any way incomplete or irregular. The Owner reserves the
right to award the Contract in the Owner's best interest.
1.6 BID DOCUMENTS:
A. Bidders may obtain two (2) sets of Bid Documents at the office of the Architect for a
refundable deposit of one hundred dollars($100.00). Deposits will be refunded if the
Bid Documents are returned in good condition within two(2)weeks of the bid opening.
B. The Bidder receiving the Contract Award will retain Bid Documents and have the
deposit automatically refunded. �-
1.7. BONDS:
A. Bid Security is not required.
B. The successful Bidder will not be held for this Project.
1.8 INQUIRIES:
All inquiries during the bidding period shall be made to:
Stephen C. McCullar, Architect
1543 Kingsley Avenue, Building 15
Orange Park, FL 32073
(904) 264-3433
All inquiries must be in writing, and responses, if necessary, will be issued by Addendum
only.
END OF SECTION 00020
00020-2 Rev. 6/01 �*
on
C-668
SECTION 00300
BID PROPOSAL FORM
SUBMIT IN TRIPLICATE ON CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD
TO:
FOR:
Pursuant to and in compliance with the Invitation to Bid and the proposed Contract Documents,
the undersigned,having become thoroughly familiar with the terms and conditions of the proposed
Contract Documents and with the local conditions affecting the performance and costs of the Work
at the place where the Work is to be completed, and having fully inspected the site in all
particulars, hereby proposes and agrees to fully perform the Work within the time stated and
in strict accordance with the proposed Contract Documents, including furnishing any and all labor
and materials,and to do all the Work required to construct and complete said Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, for the following sum of money:
A. LUMP SUM $
All allowances specified in the Contract Documents are included in the appropriate Base Bid.
(Initial affirmation of the statement).
Respectively submitted,
(Bidder)
SEAL:
(Address)
Attest: Witness:
Individual trading in own name
Individual trading under firm name
e
Co-partners trading under firm name
Corporation: State of Principal Office
President
(Name) (Address)
END OF SECTION 00300
"' 00300-1 Rev. 6/01
M"
.4
w
*4,
C-668
SECTION 00700
AIA GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, Latest
Edition, issued by the American Institute of Architects, and its Supplements if any, relates directly
to the Work of this Project and is hereby made a part of the Contract as though fully contained in
these Specifications.
The Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to obtain the
necessary number of copies of AIA Document A201, to acquaint himself with the Articles
contained therein and to notify and apprise all Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors, suppliers and
any other parties to the Contract or individuals or agencies engaged on the Work as to its
contents.
No contractual adjustments shall be made as a result of failure on the part of the Contractor to
fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the Contract with the conditions of AIA Document
A201.
END OF SECTION 00700
40
00700-1 Rev. 6/01
ARM
w*
w
.•w
,NA
C-668
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
A. These Supplementary Conditions modify, extend and add to provisions of the General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, Latest Edition, for
" speck project requirements. Modifications specified herein supplement, change, delete
from and add to above-referenced AIA Document A201. Where a portion of the General
Conditions is modified herein,the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain
in effect. Paragraphs not listed herein are not modified. The General Conditions and
Supplementary Conditions apply to all Sections in each Division of the Specifications and
the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for informing all applicable parties. This
becomes especially critical when partial sets of Plans and Specifications are issued to
Subcontractors not familiar with these requirements. General Contractors are responsible
for verifying Bids prior to submitting the Bid.
ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS
1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT:
A. Paragraph 1.2.3: ADD the following Subparagraphs:
ON .1 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, the
Architect's interpretations will be based on the following priorities:
1. The Agreement.
2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier
date.
3. The Supplementary Conditions.
4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
5. Drawings and Specifications.
.2 In case of an inconsistency between the Drawings and Specifications or within
either Document as to a material, product system, dimension, size, quantity or
method,the Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the cost of providing the
more expensive, better quality or greater quantity material, product, system,
dimension, size quantity or method. The Architect will interpret the inconsistency
and the Contract Sum will be adjusted when the intent of the Contract
*' 00800-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
Documents is interpreted by the Architect and his interpretation is that the intent
was to be the less expensive, lesser quality or lesser quantity material, product,
system, dimension, size, quantity or method.
B. Paragraph 1.2: ADD the following Subparagraph:
1.2.6 References in these Contract Documents to standards including trade
associations, Federal and Military Specifications, technical societies,
organizations,and associations,codes and government authorities whether
specific or by implication, shall refer to the latest issue or edition in effect
30 days, prior to date of receipt of Bids or date of the Agreement, if there
were no Bids, unless a date is specified. The provisions of referenced
standards shall not change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner,the ,
Contractor, or the Architect, or any of their consultants, agents or
employees.
1.2.7 The word "provide" shall mean furnish and install the indicated term,
product, material or system unless otherwise indicated.
1.2.8 The terms "as shown" or"as indicated" or phrases of similar import, shall
mean as shown or indicated on the Drawings.
ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS:
A. Add Paragraphs 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and 3.4.5 as follows:
3.4.3 The Contractor shall not use or allow to be used and shall not furnish or -R
install any material, product, equipment or tool that contains or uses
asbestos or any other toxic material or substance, as determined by the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,for use in or on the Project,whether
temporary or permanent. Should the Contractor determine that a material,
product or equipment that is specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents contains asbestos or any other toxic material or substance,the .,
Contractor shall not install the material, product or equipment and shall
notify the Architect immediately.
3.4.4 Substitutions: After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the
Architect will consider a written request for substitution of products in place
of those specified only under conditions set forth herein.
1 Materials, products, and systems are specified in the Contract Documents
by manufacturer, trade name or distributor to establish a standard of the
required criteria, including function, performance, dimension, appearance "
and quality to be met by a proposed substitution. Each application shall
00800-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
include name, Specification Section, Paragraph and manufacturer of the
material, product, equipment or system for which it is to be substituted and
a complete description of the proposed substitute including Drawings,
product data, performance and test data and all other information
necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth all changes in other
materials, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in
Work of other Contracts, that incorporation of the substitute would cause
or require, shall be included with the application for a substitution. The
application shall include an itemized cost estimate indicating all cost and
saving caused by the acceptance of the substitute. The burden of proof of
merit of proposed substitute is upon the proposer.
.2 Substitutes shall not be incorporated in the Work without prior written
approval of the substitute by the Architect.
.3 Where material, products, or systems are specified by one or more
manufacturers with model number(s)or specific item, identification and "or
approved equal" is included, only the item(s) that is specified by
manufacturers with model number(s) or specific identification is approved
and any other item shall be submitted for approval same as a substitution.
.4 Where materials, products, equipment or systems are specified by a
referenced standard or performance specification, the item must be
submitted for approval same as a substitute.
.5 Applications submitted for approval as substitutions shall be by the
Contractor and not by Subcontractor or Supplier. Each item submitted for
substitution shall be a separate submittal.
.6 Whether or not the Architect and Owner accept a proposed substitute,
when notified by the Owner, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for
the Architect's cost for the Architect and the Architect's consultants for
evaluating any proposed substitute including changes required in the
Contract Documents for the substitute.
F .7 The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed
substitution shall be final.
3.4.5 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above,
the Contractor:
.1 Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed
substitute item and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to
that specified;
"" 00800-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the
substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;
.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related
costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives
all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently
becomes apparent; and
.4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such
changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE:
A. Add Paragraph 3.11.2 as follows:
3.11.2 Additional requirements for Record Documents are specified in Division 1 -�
General Requirements.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES:
A. Add Paragraphs 3.12.12 thru 3.12.17 as follows:
3.12.12 Contractor shall stamp each item in each Submittal with his firm approval
stamp,date and sign each copy. Contractor shall not reproduce Architect's
Drawings for Shop Drawings without written approval of the Architect.
3.12.13 Submittal: Submit six(6)copies of product data and Shop Drawings to the
Architect. The Architect will mark-up his review comments on the copies
and return three (3) of the marked-up copies of Drawings and three (3)
marked-up copies of product data to the Contractor.
3.12.14 Mark-up: Shop Drawings and data will be reviewed by the Architect and
marked APPROVED, APPROVED AS NOTED, RETURNED FOR
CORRECTIONS, NOT APPROVED OR RETURNED WITHOUT ACTION
. Submittal returned APPROVED AS NOTED need not be returned if
Architect's comments are acceptable to the Contractor. Submittal returned
NOT APPROVED, and RETURNED FOR CORRECTION must be
resubmitted. Architect's comments will be marked in red pen.
3.12.15 When submittals are returned to the Contractor stamped NOT APPROVED
or RETURN FOR CORRECTIONS and the second time and returns are
through no fault of the Architect, then the Contractor shall reimburse the "
Owner for the Architect's Cost for review of all Submittal of the same item
that are resubmitted the third time. The Architect's cost is defined in
Paragraph 4.1.5.
00800-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.12.16 Transmittal:Contractor shall use transmittal letter provided by the Architect.
Submit separate transmittal letter and one(1)copy for each group of Shop
MW Drawings common to a portion of the Work and separate transmittal letter
and one (1) copy for each Section of the Specifications. Partial Submittal
are not acceptable. Each item in the Submittal must be listed in the
transmittal letter. The Architect will return transmittal letter to Contractor
with each returned Submittal with disposition noted for each item.
3.12.17 Samples: Submit samples, in the quantity required by the Specifications
Section, where it is specified, accompanied by same transmittal letter as
used for Drawings and product data.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION:
A. Add Paragraph 3.18.4 as follows:
3.18.4 For ten dollars ($10.00), acknowledged to be included and paid for by the
Owner, in the Contract Sum, and other good and valuable consideration,
the Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and his
agents and employees in accordance with the provisions of this Paragraph
3.18 and of Paragraph 3.17. For ten dollars($10.00), and other good and
valuable consideration, to be paid to the Contractor by the Architect after
execution of the Agreement by the Contractor and the Owner, the
Contractor also agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Architect and
his agents, employees and his consultants in accordance with the
provisions of this Paragraph 3.18 and of Paragraph 3.17.
4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT:
Add as follows:
From Paragraph 4.2.10, DELETE the second sentence in its entirety.
4.2.12.1 Should the Contractor fail to request interpretations or questionable items in the
Contract Documents, neither the Owner nor the Architect will thereafter entertain
an excuse for failure to execute the Work in a satisfactory manner.
4.2.12.2 Should conflict occur between the Contract Documents, the Contractor is
deemed to have estimated upon the more expensive method of performing the
Work unless he has requested and received a written decision from the Architect
before submission of his Proposal.
To Paragraph 4.2.13, ADD the following:
A. Contractor shall commence the Work on the date established in the Agreement.
00800-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
The term"artistic effect'as used herein refers to color,texture,profile and juxtaposition AM
of masses. The Architect shall be the sole interpreter of the design intent with respect
to such matters, but the Architect's authority with respect thereto shall not contravene
any other rights of either the Owner or the Contractor ascribed to them by other ..
provisions of the Contract.
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES:
C. Paragraph 4.3.6: Add Subparagraph 4.3.6.1 as follows:
1 When data on subsurface investigations including soil borings, ground water
table and other data on existing conditions above and below the ground surface
is included in the Contract Documents or made available by the Architect, the ,
data is made available for information indicating only the conditions found by said
investigations and is limited to the exact locations and dates listed in the data
available. The Architect and the Owner shall not be responsible for variations
found to exist between data made available and actual field conditions. The
Contractor shall make his own investigations of ground water table conditions
and other existing conditions and shall not assume that ground water table
conditions remain the same after the date and time the available data was made.
ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE
WORK:
A. Paragraph 5.2.1: Add Subparagraph 5.2.1.1. as follows:
.1 Not later than thirty (30) days after date of commencement,the Contractor shall
furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or
entities proposed as manufacturers for each of the products identified in the
General Requirements(Division 1 of the Specifications) and, where applicable, ,
the name of the installing Subcontractor.
ARTICLE 6 -CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS ,
ADD the following Section 6.1.1.1:
The term "Owner's own forces" may include a potential Subcontractor to the Contractor,
provided no formal subcontract between the two exists. The Contractor is obligated to
execute subcontract agreements per Article 5.1.1.
ARTICLE 7 -CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES:
00800-6 Rev. 6/01
ON
C-668
A. Paragraph 7.3.6: In the first sentence, DELETE the words"a reasonable allowance for
overhead and profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in
accordance with Subparagraphs 7.3.10.1 thru 7.3.10.6 below".
B. Paragraph 7.3 -add the following Paragraph:
7.3.10 In Paragraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit
included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following
schedule:
.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own
forces, 10% of the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's
Subcontractor, 10% of the amount due the Subcontractor.
.3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work
performed by that Subcontractor's orSub-subcontractor's own forces,
10% of the cost.
.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's
Sub-subcontractors, 5% of the amount due the Sub-Subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined
in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all
proposals, unless otherwise agreed upon, shall be accompanied by
a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and
Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner
prescribed above.Subcontracts shall be itemized also. In no case will
a change be approved without such itemization.
7.3.6 In the first sentence, DELETE the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead
and profit" and SUBSTITUTE "an allowance for overhead and profit in
accordance with the schedule set forth in Subparagraph 7.3.10.1 through
7.3.10.6 below".
Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 to 7.3:
7.3.10 In Subparagraphs 7.3.6 the allowance for overhead and profit combined,
" included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule:
ARTICLE 8 -TIME
00800-7 Rev. 6/01
C-668
8.1.1.1 For Bidding purposes, the Contract Time shall be 90 calendar days from date of
commencement to date of Substantial Completion.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME: 4
A. Paragraph 8.3.1: Add the following Subparagraph:
.1 Contract time lost because of delays described in Paragraph 8.3.1 will be
determined by the number of days that the critical path of events is extended
because of the delay, regardless of the number of days of delay. The Contractor
is required to prepare a path of critical events by diagram or other form to justify
the number of days in a delay. The critical path is the sequence of major
construction events that must be performed in sequence and which requires a „
longer total construction time than any other sequence.
ARTICLE 9 -PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
A. Add Paragraph as follows:
9.2.2 The Schedule of Values shall be prepared on AIA Documents G702
andG703, Certificate for Payment. Schedule shall be itemized in CSI 16
Division format(Division 0 thru Division 16). Each major item of Work and
each subcontracted item within each Division shall be itemized.
Contractor's overhead, profit and other cost shall be distributed
proportionately in each item. The total of the items shall equal the Contract
Sum.
9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT; ADD as follows:
9.3.4 Make Applications for Payment monthly. Use AIA Form G702 and continuation
Sheet G703 for all applications. Place sub-total or total at the bottom of each
sheet and continuation sheet. Each Application for Payment shall be due on or
before the first day of each month and shall be based on 90% of the Contract
price of labor and materials suitable stored at the site thereof up to the 25th day
of that month, less the aggregates of previous payments. Progress payments
shall be made by the Owner on or before the 10th day of the month following
Owner's receipt of Architect's Certificate for Payment. "
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS; ADD as follows:
9.6.7 Progress Payments and Final Payment to the Contractor will be made as
required by the Mechanics' Lien Law, in the State in which the project is located.
00800-8 Rev. 6/01
C-668
9.6.8 The Contractor's initial Application shall consist solely of the Application and
Certificate for Payment. Subsequent Applications shall be accompanied by
properly executed partial Releases of Lien by all Subcontractors, Laborers, and
Material Suppliers who have served Notice to Owner supporting all payments
made up to and including the Contractor's previous Application for Payment. All
partial Release of Lien for this Project shall be consistent in form and wording
and shall be approved by the Owner and Architect.
9.11 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
9.11.1 The Owner will suffer financial loss if the Project is not Substantially Complete on
the date set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be liable for
and shall pay to the Owner the sums hereinafter stipulated as fixed, agreed and
Liquidated Damages for each calendar date of delay until the Work is
Substantially Complete:
Two Hundred Dollars ($200.00).
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.02 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY; ADD as follows:
10.2.8 Contractor shall provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the
course of the construction period of the type and size as recommended by the
National Fire Protection Association,to control fires resulting from the particular
Work being performed, and the Contractor shall instruct his employees in their
use.All extinguishers shall be placed in the immediate vicinity of the Work being
performed ready for instant use. In the use of especially hazardous types of
equipment, such as acetylene torches, welding equipment, tar pots, kettles,
salamanders, etc., no Work shall be commenced or equipment used unless fire
extinguishers of an approved type and capacity are placed in the working area
and available for immediate use by the workmen using the above-mentioned
equipment.
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE
11.1 Contractor shall take out, pay for and maintain at all times during the prosecution of the
Work under the Contract, the following forms of insurance by carriers acceptable to and
approved by the Owner.
.1 Statutory Workman's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance: The
Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this Contract, Statutory
Workmen's Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance with a limit of
One Hundred Thousand Dollars($100,000)for all of his employees to be engaged on
the Project under this Contract. In case of any such Work sublet, the Contractor shall
"` 00800-9 Rev. 6/01
C-668
similarly require Subcontractors to provide the same insurance for all of the
Subcontractor's employed to be engaged in such Work unless such employees are
covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Workmans Compensation
Insurance. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the Project
under this Contract is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the
Contractor shall provide, and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide, adequate
Employer's Liability Insurance for the protection of such of the employees as are not
otherwise protected.
.2 General Liability and Property Damage Insurance: The Contractor shall take out and
maintain during the life of this Contract such Public Liability and Property Damage
Insurance as shall protect him and any Subcontractor performing the Work covered by
this Contract from claims for damages of personal injury, including accidental death, „
as well as from claims of property damages which may arise from operations underthis
Contract, including blasting when blasting is done on or in connection with this Work
of this Project , whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, and the amounts of such
insurance shall be as follows:
A. Comprehensive General Liability Limits:
Bodily Injury (Occurrence Basis)
Per Person $ 500,000
Per Occurrence $ 1,000,000
Property Damage $ 500,000
Per Occurrence
B. Contractual Liability as regards this Contract, as per General Conditions Article
4.18 entitled "Indemnification".
C. Protective Liability
Contractor(Independent)
Owner
D. Completed Operations.
E. Automobile Comprehensive Liability - $300,000.00. Policy shall include
Automobile Bodily Injury Liability Insurance covering all Contractor owned
vehicles. The Contractor shall similarly require Subcontractors to provide
Automobile Property Damage Liability Insurance. (NOTE:The coverage shall be
amended to an "Occurrence Basis".
.3 Builder's Risk Insurance:The Contractor shall effect and maintain during the life of this
Project - until the Project is accepted by the Owner - an ALL RISK Builder's Risk
Insurance Policy to include as insureds the Owner,the Architect and/or Engineer,the
00800-10 Rev. 6/01 Milk
.W
C-668
General Contractor,the Subcontractors and/or Sub-Subcontractors as their respective
interest may appear. This policy shall include but not be limited to the perils of Fire,
Lighting, Windstorm, Hurricane, Hail, Explosion, Riot, Civil Commotion, Smoke,
Aircraft, Land Vehicles, Vandalism, Malicious Mischief, etc., in an amount equal to
100% of the Contract Sum (but not including excavation, filling, grading, demolition,
foundations, paving, side-walks, curbs and gutters, and other similar non-insurable
items).
In the event it is necessary to operate permanently installed equipment on other than
a testing basis or in the event it is necessary for the Owner to occupy a part of or the
entire structure, the Contractor agrees to have the Builder's Risk Insurance Policy
endorsed to permit same.
.4 Proof of Carriage of Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a
satisfactory proof of carriage of the Insurance required. Certificates of Insurance will
be required in duplicate for file with the Owner and Architect. Such certificates to
provide that the Owner is entitled to the same notice as that given to the purchaser of
the insurance in case of cancellation or any major change therein.
11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND:
Not Required for this Project.
ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
Not modified.
ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. Add Paragraph 13.8 as follows:
*► 13.8 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:
13.8.1 Before commencing Work, a conference will be held for the purpose of
verifying general procedures, expediting Shop Drawings and Schedules
and to establish a working understanding between the parties. The
Contractor,the Contractor's job Superintendent and representatives to the
Architect shall attend the conference. The Contractor shall have
representatives of Mechanical and Electrical and other major
Subcontractors present. The date and time of the conference shall be
agreed upon by the Contractor and Architect.
END OF SECTION 00800
"" 00800-11 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01020
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
°* A. Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowance amounts specified herein
in the appropriate Base Bid.
B. Refer to Article 3, Paragraph 3.8, of the General Conditions for provisions
governing Allowances.
1.2 SCOPE OF ALLOWANCES:
A. Purchase Only: Allowance amount shall cover the purchase cost of Allowance
„ work to Contractor, delivered to site including all required taxes. All other
Contractor's cost related to installation or application of Allowance work shall be
included in the Contract Sum in the appropriate Base Bid and not in the Allowance
as defined in the General Conditions.
B. Purchase and Installation: Allowance amount shall cover the total cost of
Allowance work to Contractor including applicable taxes and Contractor costs for
purchase, unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses related to the purchase and installation of Allowance
work.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE:
A. As soon as possible after award of contract, advise Architect of scheduled date
when final selection and purchase of the work of each allowance must be
accomplished to avoid delays in performance of the work.
B. Obtain proposals from vendors for the work of each Allowance, as directed by the
Architect, for use by the Owner and the Architect for making the final selections of
Allowance work.
C. Submit proposals to Architect for approval and selection before entering into
agreement with vendors.
D. The Architect will specify by written authorization and Change Order, the name of
the approved Vendor(s) and the approved amount of each Allowance.
01020-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
E. Allowance for Testing: The Architect will designate the testing firm, the approved
amount, and type and location of tests.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES:
A. The following Allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum in the
appropriate Base Bid:
DESCRIPTION SCOPE AMOUNT
1. Ceramic Tile Purchase and Installation $8.00/SF
(Including Underlayment)
2. Carpet Purchase and Installation $18.00/SY
3. Exterior Signage Purchase and Installation $ 2,500.00
END OF SECTION 01020
01020-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
Imp SECTION 01060
CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 STANDARDS:
A. The following codes apply to this project and all aspects of construction shall conform
to the strictest requirements of these codes:
1. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA.)
2. Standard Building Code, Latest Edition, with amendments (SBCCI)
3. Standard Plumbing Code, Latest Edition, with amendments
4. National Electrical Code, Latest Edition, with amendments (NEC)
5. Standard Mechanical Code, Latest Edition, with amendments
6. Standard Gas Code, Latest Edition, with amendments
7. NFPA Life Safety Code, Latest Edition, with amendments
8. ANSI A117.1, Latest Edition, with amendments
1.2 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES:
A. Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all laws, codes, and ordinances
applicable to the work. This shall include federal, state, county and/or municipal
entities having jurisdiction. If governing laws, codes or ordinances conflict with this
specification,then the laws,codes or ordinances shall take precedence,except where
these specifications exceed them in quality of materials or labor,then the specifications
shall be followed. When a conflict occurs, the Architect shall be notified before
proceeding with the work.
1.3 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Except as otherwise required by this Section, all products and workmanship shall
conform to the best quality and practices recognized by the agencies, associations,
councils, etc., as specified in individual Sections.
B. In the absence of specified standards, the Contractor shall conform to the
requirements of the most widely recognized standards for each particular portion of the
work.
1.4 FEES AND PERMITS:
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all impact and utility connection fees
and permits which may be required in connection with the execution of this work. He
01060-1 Rev. 6/01
4"
C-668
shall pay for other temporary or permanent permits, licenses or highway fees required,
including legal notices and legal fees required unless otherwise specified in these
Specifications.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS:
Not Applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 . COPIES:.
A. Provide the Architect and Owner with copies of all permits as they are issued. Secure „ft
approvals and certificates of inspection and occupancy that may be required by
authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
END OF SECTION 01060
4W
AM
am
44
W
01060-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
,. SECTION 01070
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Execute cutting (including excavating), fitting or patching of Work required to:
1. Saw cut and remove existing floor slab as required.
2. Uncover work to provide for installation of Work.
3. Remove and replace defective Work.
4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to Contract Documents.
5. Install specified Work in existing construction.
6. Provide access to concealed work and restore to original condition.
1.2 SAMPLES:
A. Should conditions of Work indicate a need for a change of materials or methods,
submit a written recommendation to the Architect, including, but not limited to:
1. Conditions necessitating change.
2. Recommendations for alternative materials and methods.
3. Submittals for substitute materials.
B. Submit written notice to the Owner and Architect designating what period of time the
Work will be uncovered to allow for observation.
1.3 PAYMENT FOR COSTS:
A. Costs incurred and caused by ill-timed sequences of installation, defective materials,
unacceptable methods of installation or Work not conforming to Contract Documents,
including, but not limited to, additional architectural or engineering fees, testing,
removal and replacement costs shall be bome by the Contractor.
B. Costs incurred and caused by Work done through written instructions and directions
of the Owner or Architect,other than the removal and replacement of defective or non-
conforming Work, will be bome by the Owner.
1.4 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or
damage during:
01070-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Demolition of existing construction.
B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.
1.5 PREPARATION:
A. Prior to cutting:
1. Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity
of Work and verify location of structural members to prevent damage.
2. Provide protection for other portions of Project.
3. Provide protection from the elements.
1.6 PERFORMANCE:
A. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply
with specified tolerances and finishes.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other Work,
and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new Work.
C. Restore Work which has been cut or removed, and install new products to provide
completed Work in accord with Contract Documents. `
D. Refinish adjacent or entire surfaces as necessary to provide a uniform finish and
appearance. Ave
END OF SECTION 01070
01070-2 Rev. 6/01 '"�
C-668
SECTION 01200
JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUPERVISION:
A. The Contractor shall provide a qualified, full-time Superintendent at the project site
throughout the construction. The Superintendent shall maintain at the job site a
complete and accessible file containing all submittals, shop drawings and samples
approved by the Architect as well as supplemental erection or installation instructions
for these items.
• B. The Superintendent or his designee will be present on the job site at all times the
project site is manned by the Contractor or any Subcontractor. This will ensure the
Architect or Owner representative will have access to a representative of the
Contractor at all times.
C. The Superintendent shall henceforth make every effort to expeditiously coordinate all
phases of the work, including the required reporting procedures, to obtain the end
result within the full purpose and intent of the Drawings and Specifications for the
Project.
D. The Superintendent will ensure that any Owner-supplied equipment or materials left
in the construction area shall not become a victim of theft, damage, or destruction.
F0 E. The Contractor shall not remove the existing Superintendent without first notifying the
Architect in writing. And then only after providing the new Superintendent enough time
to familiarize himself with the project.
1.2 FIELD OFFICE:
A. Field office is not required for this project. Set up layout table for plans and post all
permits at convenient location.
1.3 ACCESS TO THE SITE:
A. Access to the site and construction operations shall at no time interfere with the normal
business operations of neighboring buildings ortheir parking,nor cause damage to any
of the existing buildings, paving, utilities or landscaping. In the event that any should
occur, the Contractor shall repair, replace or otherwise correct the damage at his own
expense.
01200-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.4 SITE MAINTENANCE:
A. The Contractor shall maintain the building and site in a safe manner, free from
accumulation of construction debris. Clean and remove debris from the site at least **
once a week.
1.5 PUBLIC ACCESS:
A. Comply with the requirements of the governing authorities concerning the use of the
public streets and right-of-ways for deliveries, access and construction. Maintain in
good condition and repair or replace pavement,curbs,utilities and other improvements
damaged during construction to the satisfaction of the governing authority having
jurisdiction. .,
1.6 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:
A. Before beginning work at the site the Contractor shall attend a pre-construction
conference scheduled by the Owner and bring with him the Superintendent employed
for this project.At this time all parties concerned will discuss the project under contract
and prepare a program of procedure in keeping with requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications.
B. The purpose of this conference will be to discuss and clarify contract administration
procedures which will be employed during construction.
C. The pre-construction meeting shall be held at time and date to be determined by the
Owner.
D. Attendance: •.
1. Owner
2. Architect
3. Engineers
4. Contractor
5. Superintendent
6. Subcontractors
E. Agenda
1. Construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing. AR
3. Coordination of Subcontractors.
4. Designation of responsible personnel and duties.
5. Processing of field decisions and Change Orders.
6. Submittals. .R
7. Use of premises and site.
01200-2 Rev. 6/01 ..
C-668
8. Delivery of materials.
9. Security procedures.
10. Permits and Approvals, including Pay Requests.
11. Other pertinent issues.
END OF SECTION 01200
"�' 01200-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents: The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, (if any), along with the
General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 Construction Schedule:
A. The Contractor, within ten (10) days of award of the Contract, shall prepare and
submit, with approval of the Architect, a complete graphic construction schedule
showing dates upon which each item or Subdivision of the work shall begin and end.
Schedule shall also show required delivery dates for material or equipment to be
supplied by the Owner.
B. The graphic schedule shall be divided into at least weekly periods so that at any period
the actual state of the work may be clearly determined.
C. Schedule shall be updated monthly and distributed to appropriate agencies.
1.3 Manufacturer's Specifications:
A. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the Drawings or in
Specifications,in reference to his required service or product, and at no qualifications
or specification of such is included, then the material gauges, details of manufacturer,
finish, etc., shall be in accordance with his standard practice, directions or
specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for any infringement of patents,
royalties,,or copyrights which may be incurred thereby.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Show Drawings and Samples:
A. Shop Drawings and submittals as required by other Sections of these Specifications
shall be submitted in a timely manner, dated and contain the following: name of
project; and complete description or names of equipment, materials and items, and
complete information including locations which materials are to be installed, and
methods of attachment or anchorage.
'" 01300-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Shop Drawings shall be accompanied by transmittal letter containing project name,
Contractor's name, number of drawings,titles and other pertinent data. Each submittal
shall be numbered sequentially and the reference number used as identification on all
correspondence.
C. Submittals shall be on opaque paper and may also be manufacturers printed data
sheets adopted to the project requirements. Submit in sufficient quantity, six (6)
minimum, to provide the following:
Copy for Owner
Copy for Architect
Copy for Consultant (if appropriate)
Copies required by Contractor .�
Copy for job site
Copy for Subcontractor
The number of submittals required will be determined at the Pre-construction meeting.
Failure to provide the required number of copies will be grounds for immediate
rejection and resubmittal. The General Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring
that the submittal procedures are followed carefully by each subcontractor or vendor.
D. Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first be checked and
approved by the Contractor, the prima facie envelope of which shall be a "checked"
stamp marked "Approved as Noted" on each Shop Drawing, placed thereon by the
Contractor. Shop Drawings received without the Contractor's"checked"stamp will be
cause for immediate return without further action. Each drawing correctly submitted
will be checked by the Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways:
1. No exceptions taken.
2. Comply with markings.
3. Revise and submit.
E. Samples required shall be as specified and shall include identification of the specific
item and the submittal number to which it applies. The following Samples are a partial
list:
1. Samples:
Cabinets and Cabinet Hardware
Laminates
Finish Door Hardware
Acoustical Ceiling Tile and Grid
Ceramic Tile
Resilient Tile Flooring
Wall Base
Carpet
01300-2 Rev. 6/01 ^�^
C-668
F. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of
Shop Drawings for approval to allow adequate time for checking of Drawings,
manufacture and shipment of items to job site in sufficient time to prevent delaying
Progress Schedule.
G. It shall also be responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of Shop
Drawings of items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer but are
designed to interface when installed.
H. The Owner will not grant time extension based on delays due to improper scheduling
of work; and the Owner, at his discretion, may withhold progress payments until such
time as these requirements are fully satisfied.
I. The following is a partial list of required Shop Drawings; and Descriptive Literature,
provide Shop Drawings and/or Descriptive Literature of other items as required in the
Technical Sections of the Specifications.
Cabinet Work, Countertops and Hardware
Insulation
Steel Doors and Frames
Wood Doors
Finish Hardware
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
Ceramic Tile and Grout
Resilient Tile Flooring
Wall Base
Paint
Signage
Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
Toilet Accessories
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
Registers, and Diffusers
Fans
Electrical Wiring Devices and Outlets
Lighting Fixtures
2.2 Warranties and Guarantees: Warranties and guarantees shall begin on the official date
of substantial completion and shall be in effect for a minimum of one year unless specified
" for a longer period. Include all specific items covered,company name(s)and addresses and
names of person authorized to warrant or guarantee items, if not blanket coverage.
A. If, within any guarantee period repairs or changes are required in connection with the
guarantee work which, in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, is rendered
01300-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are
defective or inferior or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract,the Contractor
shall promptly upon receipt of notice form the Owner, and without expense to the
Owner, proceed to:
1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular, all of such guaranteed work,
correct all defects therein, and:
2. Make good all damages to the structure or site or equipment or contents thereof
which, in the opinion of the Architect-or Engineer, are the result of the use of
materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in
accordance with the terms of the Contracts; and
3. Make good any work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures or
site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee.
If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms
of guarantee,the Owner may have the defects corrected and the Contractor and
his Surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred.
2.3 The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, as part of the Substantial Completion
Requirements, Three (3) complete sets of Maintenance and Operating Manuals, in
hardcover ring binders, indexed and divided into the Sections, with taps for ease of locating
the various Sections. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner in Three (3) copies the
manufacturer's name and address, nearest distributor's name, address and phone number,
nearest service representative's name,address,office and home phone numbers,complete
diagrams, operating instructions, maintenance manuals and parts lists for each item of
equipment.
2.4 Review of Submittals:
A. Architect's review is for general compliance with Contract Documents. Markings do not
relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for correctness of dimensions and details and for
coordination of the work of all trades.
B. Any submittal marked"Revise and Resubmit"shall be corrected in a timely manner and
clearly marked as a re-submittal. No time will be granted for delays caused the .,
submittal of incomplete or incorrect submittals.
C. The Contractor is to schedule the sequence of submittals to allow the Architect
sufficient time to review the shop drawings. Shop drawings should be submitted in the
sequence of construction, and in the case where the Architect receives several
submittals at one time, the submittals will be processed in the order that they are
perceived to be in the critical path.
2.5 Written Documents:
01300-4 Rev. 6/01 " '
"rl
C-668
A. All written documents, including letters, transmittals and requests by the Contractor
shall be on standard letter or legal size paper and include Contractors name, project
name, Architect's project number, date, and be signed by authorized personnel.
B. The Architect, in noting and marking submittals,will use the color red. The Contractor
shall use the color green. All other colored markings shall be disregarded.
C. Contractor shall have at lease one complete set of Contract Documents, approved
submittals and Shop Drawings on the job site at all times, when work is in progress.
2.6 As-Built Drawings:
A. During the progress of the work the job Superintendent for the plumbing, air
conditioning and electrical Subcontractors shall record their field sets of Drawings the
exact locations,as installed,of all underground and otherwise concealed conduit,pipe
and duct lines which were not installed exactly as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Pipelines and ducts which are installed in furred spaces, pipe chases, or other spaces
which can be readily inspected by the use of access panels or other means of access
will not be considered as being concealed.
C. With reference to electrical work, the exact conduit runs shall be shown on these
Drawings.
D. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the data shall be recorded in ink, to scale,
by a competent draftsman on sepia line prints on transparent paper of the Contract
Drawings. Sepias will be furnished to the Contractor by the Architect, but cost shall be
bome by the Contractor. Where changes are to be recorded,the sepia line prints shall
be erased before the changes are made. Each sheet shall bear the date and name
of the Subcontractor submitting the Drawings. The sepia line prints shall be submitted
to the Architect upon completion, together with two (2) sets of blue line or black line
prints.
E. The project shall not be acceptable as Finally Complete until the submittal and
approval of the As-Built Drawings.
END OF SECTION 01300
01300-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included: Temporary facilities and controls required for this project include, but
are not necessarily limited to:
1. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity and telephone.
2. Sanitary facilities.
3. Enclosures and coverings such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies.
4. Construction site security.
5. Fire protection.
6. Traffic maintenance and control.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Compliance with safety regulations:Compliance with all requirements of pertinent
regulations is described in General Conditions.
2. Subcontractor Equipment:Exceptfor equipment fumished by Subcontractors,all
other equipment shall comply with all requirements of pertinent safety
regulations. The ladders, hoists, planks and similar items normally furnished by
individual trades in execution of their own portions of the work are not part of this
Section of these Specifications.
3. Utility Hook-Up: Installation and hook-up of the various utility lines are described
in other pertinent Sections of these Specifications.
1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to maintain temporary facilities and controls in
proper and safe condition throughout progress of the work.
B. Replacements: In the event of loss or damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to
the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UTILITIES:
A. Temporary Utilities:
1. General: Water and Power are available in the building. Owner will be
reimbursed for utility cost incurred during construction period.
01500-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2.2 SANITARY FACILITIES:
A. The existing toilet room can be set up for use by all personnel. Comply with all
minimum requirements of public agencies having jurisdiction. Maintain in a sanitary °
condition at all times.
2.3 ENCLOSURES: �^
A. Furnish, install and maintain for the duration of construction all required scaffolds,
tarpaulins„ barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other
temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with
all required safety and other pertinent regulations.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY:
A. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure the security of the
construction site.
2.5 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION:
A. Provide fire protection equipment during the entire construction period as required by
the authority having jurisdiction.
2.6 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE AND CONTROL:
A. Whenever the Contractor's operations affect public vehicular or pedestrian traffic,the
Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and maintenance of any and all
traffic control devices as deemed necessary by the authority having jurisdiction.
Additionally, the Owner requires that all construction traffic use rear entry stairs and
clean-up at the end of each work day.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL:
A. Maintain all temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for the safe and proper
completion of the work. Remove all such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly
as progress of the work will permit or as directed by the Architect.
B. Contractor shall furnish three (3) contact names and phone numbers for emergency
calls.
END OF SECTION 01500
01500-2 Rev. 6/01 ..
C-668
SECTION 01620
MATERIALS, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DELIVERY:
A. All materials shall be new and delivered to the site in original manufacturer's or
fabricator's bundles, packages, containers, etc. and tagged or otherwise marked or
labeled for proper identification.
1.2 STORAGE:
A. Store all materials in appropriate mannerfrom elements and weather off ground,under
cover or in enclosures as required by manufacturer's recommendations, code or trade
association recommendations.
1.3 VENTILATION:
A. Ventilate enclosed or covered areas to prevent moisture damage to materials.
1.4 CONTAMINATION:
A. Do not allow materials to become unusable by contamination from foreign matter,frost,
ice, rust, corrosion, etc.
1.5 SINGULAR SOURCE:
A. Obtain all similar types of materials or products from a single manufacturer, produced
by similar or duplicate methods. Do not change sources or brands during the course
of the Work unless approved in writing by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
As required by Specifications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect all materials and products prior to installation or incorporation into the work.
3.2 DAMAGED MATERIALS:
01620-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Do not install materials or items which are damaged or otherwise not acceptable.
Acceptance of project is contingent upon all items or materials being in proper
operating condition and free from defects, blemishes or damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all items specified or referenced by specification in locations and manner shown
or required. Proprietary items shall be installed in manner and under conditions
recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 01620
01620-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITION:
A. Close-out is the series of actions by Contractor near the end of the Contract period,
preparatory to termination of the Contract, acceptance by Architect, occupancy by the
Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of work and resulting in the Final
Payment.
B. It is the Owner's intent for the General Contractor to "construction clean" the entire
facility prior to Substantial Completion and the Architectural Punch List. The Owner
will then mobilize delivery and furniture. Prior to occupancy, the General Contractor
shall clean the entire facility with a "white glove" cleaning of all surfaces.
1.2 FINAL CLEANING:
A. Upon completion of construction, clean finish surfaces as follows:
1. Pavements: Sweep with broom to remove loose rock, dirt and construction
debris and wash with water running from a hose to remove cement stain and
other discoloration.
2. Aluminum: Wash with mild solution of non-alkali soap or detergent and remove
smudges, pencil marks, gypsum board compound and other foreign matter,
followed by clean water rinse.
3. Laminated Plastic: Rub using a damp cloth and neutral soap solution to remove
smudges, pencil marks and dirt. Remove stubborn dirt and fingerprints with
general purpose (not abrasive) cleaner.
4. Glass and Mirrors: Remove labels,wipe both sides of glass and face of mirrors
free of dirt, paint spots and other foreign matter. Wash clean and rub with
chamois,cellulose sponge or squeegee(to polish). Remove grease and sealant
using commercial solvent such as xylene, toluene, mineral spirits or naphtha,
followed by washing and rinsing. Use no razor blades or metal scrapers on
glass. Handle and clean all glass in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for the type of glass involved.
5. Ceramic Tile: Remove loose dust by vacuuming or wiping with cloth. For
stubborn smears and smudges,dampen cloth pad or sponge with water and rub
using general purpose cleaner.
6. Resilient Flooring and Base: Remove dirt,dust and stain. Leave areas"broom
clean"Apply liquid wax and buff to a high gloss using an electrically-driven motor
polisher.
01700-1 Rev. 6/01
■"
M"
C-668
7. Carpet: After installation of furniture,furnishings,telephones and the like, clean
free of soil using beater-bar type vacuum sweeper. Pick up scraps, waste
material, and remove other foreign matter.
8. Painted Surfaces: Remove dirt stains and leave clean. IR!
9. Vinyl Wall Coverings: Wipe and wash free of paste,gypsum board compound,
smudges and repair tom surfaces.
10. Plumbing; Remove all labels,wash fixtures,fittings,trim and other visible parts.
11. Air Conditioning: Prior to the start-up of air conditioning, clean all surfaces in
conditioned spaces by dusting and vacuuming and install temporary filters in air
handlers. All dust-producing operations within conditioned spaces shall be held �•+
to a minimum when the system is operating and steps shall be taken to keep dust
from becoming airborne during dust-producing operations. Upon completion of
project and prior to the Owner's occupancy, replace temporary filters with the
specified type and check coils for dirt encrustation; if build-up is sufficient to
impede air flow, remove. Prior to final start-up, manufacturer's accredited
representative shall be present to witness operations and advise procedures, if
necessary.
12. Light Fixtures: Clean free from dust and dirt. Wash lens and glassware using
cleaner such as "Windex" and dry with absorbent paper. Clean plastic per
manufacturer's recommendations;do not wipe. Lenses which are kept in original
containers until immediately prior to final inspection may not require cleaning.
Clean "Alzak" aluminum surfaces (reflectors, fixture cones and the like) per
manufacturer's recommendations, being careful to remove fingerprints and
smudges.
1.3 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
A. PHYSICAL PROPERTY:
1. Keys to locks, extra stocks, spare parts, special tools and the like.
B. RELEASES:
1. Operating certificates and similar releases,entitling Ownerto full and unrestricted •
use of the work and access to services and utilities.
C. The Contractor shall arrange for all required inspections in the jurisdiction to secure a
Certificate of Occupancy.
1.4 FINAL PAYMENT: Final payment shall be made to the Contractor as provided by the
Agreement and upon receipt of the following:
A. Completion of Architect's Punch List.
B. Record Drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
D. Extra Materials (when specified).
E. Warranties.
01700-2 Rev. 6/01 �*
C-668
F. Final Releases of Lien from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and General Contractor.
G. Final Application for Payment.
END OF SECTION 01700
01700-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the building and site in
a standard of cleanliness as described in this Section.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: In addition to standards described in this Section,
comply with all requirements for cleaning as described in various other Sections of
these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply
with all pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPATIBILITY:
A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface
being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material or as approved
by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
* 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING:
A. General:
1. Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not
impeding drainage or traffic and providing the required protection of materials.
2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material and other items
not required for construction of this work.
3. At least twice each month, and more often if'necessary, completely remove all
scrap, debris and waste material from the job site.
4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site,
observing all requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology.
01710-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Site: •
1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris
and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their '"
storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials
stored on the site. Re-stack, tidy or otherwise service all arrangements to meet
the requirements of Paragraph 3.1.A.1 above.
3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times to the approval of the
Owner.
4. Adjacent new apron constructed under another contract shall be maintained in
a clean, orderly condition at all times to the Owner's approval as work of this
Contract.
C. Structures:
1. Weekly,and more often if necessary,inspect the structures and pick up all scrap,
debris and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for
their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep all interior spaces clean. "Clean",
for the purpose of this Subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from
dust and other material capable of being removed by reasonable diligence using
a hand-held broom.
3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the
structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness
recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using all
equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.
4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily(and
more often if necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space
in which finish materials have been installed. "Clean", for the purpose of this
Subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from all foreign material
which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material.
D. Graffiti: Promptly remove all evidence of graffiti.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING:
A. Definition: Except as otherwise specifically provided, "clean" (for the purpose of this
Paragraph)shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided
by commercial building maintenance Subcontractors using commercial quality building
maintenance equipment and materials.
B. General: Prior to completion of the work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus
materials, equipment, scrap, debris and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as
described in Paragraph 3.1 above.
01710-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Site:Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect,hose down all paved areas
on the site and all public sidewalks directly adjacent to the site. Completely remove all
resultant debris.
D. Structures:
1. Exterior:Visually inspect all exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil,waste
material, smudges and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed
materials f rom adjacent surfaces. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of
exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. In the event of
stubborn stains not removable with water,the Architect and Owner may require
other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Interior:Visually inspect all interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste
material, smudges and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed
materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove all paint droppings,spots, stains and
dirt from finished surfaces.Wash all plumbing and electrical fixtures if necessary.
Remove all temporary labels. Use only the specified cleaning materials and
equipment.
3. Glass: Clean all glass inside and outside.
' 4. Polished Surfaces: To all surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed
polish, apply the specified polish as recommended by the manufacturer of the
material being polished.
E. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as approved by the Owner to accept a completely
clean project.
3.3 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY:
A. Should the Owner occupy the work or any portion thereof to its completion by the
Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning
of the occupied spaces shall be as determined by the Architect in accordance with the
General Conditions.
END OF SECTION 01710
01710-3 Rev. 6/01
I
C-668
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Refer to Article 3, Paragraph 3.11 of the General Conditions. Note that the use of the
term "As-Built Drawings" is often used interchangeably with "Record Documents."
B. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain Record Documents forthe Owner's records,
recording work as actually performed. Record Documents shall show all changes and
deviations in worts in relation to way in which it was shown and specified by original
Contract Documents. Include all additional inforlmation not indicated by original
Contract Documents. Record Documents include Contract Drawings,Shop Drawings,
Specifications,Addenda and Change Orders,Product Data Submittals,Samples,Field
records for variable and concealed conditions such as excavations and foundations,
and miscellaneous Project Record information on work not shown, or shown
schematically.
C. Speck requirements for Record Documents specified in other specification sections
are in addition to requirements specified in this Section and shall be included in Record
Documents prepared for Owner as specified in this Section.
D. The Contractor shall certify that the Record Documents which he prepares for Owner
are correct and that all requirements specified in this Section and in other Sections of
the Specifications and in other Contract Documents are included in the Record
Documents. Contractor shall affix to the "As-Built" Plans a statement certifying the
information in the Record Document to be correct and a signature line. Contractor
shall personally sign each Record Document. Signature stamp is not acceptable.
1.2 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. During progress of work, maintain one (1)complete set of Contract Drawings marked
up to show work as actually installed. Show all changes and deviations from work as
originally shown. Mark whichever drawings that will show more clearly and accurately
work as actually installed. Where Shop Drawings are marked-up, provide a cross-
reference on Contract Drawings and the corresI onding location. Note alternate
numbers, Change Order numbers and similar identification. Require each person
preparing the mark-ups to initial and date the marks and indicate name of firm. Label
each sheet "RECORD DOCUMENTS" in 3/4 inch high letters.
01720-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Piping, conduit, and other utilities shall be accurately located and identified on Record '
Drawings with installed elevation of top or invert as applicable. All piping, conduit,
electrical wiring and other plumbing, mechanical and electrical items and systems that
are concealed, embedded in concrete or otherwise concealed in the construction
without access after work is completed shall be accurately located by coordinates to
permanent structures such as walls, columns, building comers or property line comer
irons or monuments. Underground work includes work under the building(s). ,
1.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS:
A. During progress of work, maintain and mark-up one (1) copy of Specifications,
including Addenda, Change Orders and similar modifications issued in printed form
during construction. Mark-up changes and variations in actual work in comparison with
text of Specifications and modifications as issued. Identify substitutions, selection of
options and information on work that is concealed. Label front cover "RECORD
DOCUMENTS" in 3/4 inch high letters.
1.4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA:
A. During progress of work, maintain one (1) copy of each product data submittal, and
mark-up all deviations and changes in actual work in comparison with submitted
information. Identify concealed products and portions of work that are not visible after
work is complete. Label each data submittal"RECORD DOCUMENT"in 3/4 inch high -R
letters.
1.5 RECORD SAMPLES:
A. At Substantial Completion, the Architect or Owner will notify Contractor if any of
samples submitted during progress of work are to be transmitted to Owner for record
purposes.Comply with the Architect's instructions for packaging,identification marking
and delivery to Owner's sample storage space. Dispose of samples not transmitted to
Owner.
1. Field reports on excavations,foundations, underground construction and similar
work.
2. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground utilities, including top
and invert elevations of cable, piping, conduit, valves, tanks and manholes.
3. Survey establishing lines and levels of building and structures.
4. Test reports for compliance with Contract Documents.
1.6 SUBMITTAL:
01720-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Submit all Record Documents at one time to Architect for review and transmittal to
Owner. Final Payment will be withheld until Record Documents are submitted and
accepted by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01720
01720-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Prepare and furnish Operational and Maintenance Manuals for building operating
systems, equipment, and for care, preservation and maintenance of products and
finishes.
B. Operational and Maintenance Manual requirements for products,finishes, equipment
and building operating systems are included in appropriate Sections of this
Specification.
C. Operational and Maintenance Manuals shall be specially prepared for the Owner and
Owner's personnel. The Manuals shall contain information necessary for safe and
efficient operation and maintenance of building equipment and operating systems,and
information relative to the inspection, maintenance and repair of building systems,
products and finishes.
D. Operational and Maintenance Manuals shall include the information specified in
Specification Sections, and include the following information as applicable:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Copies of applicable Shop Drawings and manufacturer's product data.
3. System equipment identification,including name of manufacturer,model number
and serial number of each component.
4. Operating, maintenance and repair instructions.
5. Emergency instructions.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Copies of Warranties/Guarantees and Servide Contracts.
8. Spare parts list.
9. Names and addresses of sources of maintenance parts, materials and service
for each item.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Preparation: Shall be by personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
operation and maintenance of the equipment or system involved.
fop
01730-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. See Section 01300, Submittals.
1.4 MANUALS:
A. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders for 8-1/2" by
11"paper, 3"to 4"in thickness as necessary to accommodate contents. Provide clear
plastic sleeve on spine, for holding labels. If necessary provide separate binders to
accommodate all the information in a convenient size. ,
B. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the printed title"OPERATIONAL AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL", title of project, and subject matter covered in manual.
Indicate volume number for multiple volume sets of manuals.
C. Dividers: Heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered labeled tabs for each separate
section. Clearly mark each tab to indicate section contents.
D. Text Material: Use either manufacturer's standard printed material, or specially-
prepared data, neatly typewritten, on 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 20 pound white bond paper.
E. Drawings: Provide reinforced punched binder tabs on Drawings and bind in with text.
Fold oversize Drawings to same size as text pages.
1.5 MANUAL CONTENT:
A. Organize contents of each manual into sections for each piece of related equipment.
Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, copies of product data,
supplemented by drawings and written text, as appropriate, and copies of any
warranty, guarantee and service contract provided by manufacturer.
B. Title Page: Enclosed in a transparent plastic envelope as first sheet of each manual.
Provide following information:
1. Subject matter covered by manual.
2. Name and address of project.
3. Date of Substantial Completion.
4. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment or product
supplier.
5. Cross reference to related system in other Operational and Maintenance
Manuals.
C. Table of Contents: Provide one section in manuals for architectural products, including
applied materials and finishes, and a second section for products designed for
moisture-protection and products exposed to weather.
01730-2 Rev. 6/01 -w
."
C-668
D. When manufacturer's standard printed product data is included in manuals, include
only those sheets that are pertinent to specific part or product installed. Clearly mark
each sheet to identify each part or product included in installation.
E. When standard printed data is not available from manufacturer for operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems, prepare typewritten text, to provide the
necessary information.
F. Prepare drawings when required to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate
the relationship of component parts of equipment or systems, or to provide control or
flow diagrams.
1.6 MATERIALS AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE:
A. Provide one section in manuals for architectural products, including applied materials
and finishes, and a second section for products designed for moisture-protection and
products exposed to weather.
B. Provide complete manufacturer's data and instructions on care and maintenance of
architectural products, including applied materials and finishes.
C. Provide complete manufacturer's data with instructions on the inspection,maintenance
and repair of roofing, sealants and other products exposed to weather and for
moisture-protection.
1.7 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE:
A. Provide Operational and Maintenance Manuals for each unit of equipment, each
operating system, and each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. Refer to
Specification Section where equipment is specified for additional requirements for
- providing operation and maintenance data for various equipment and operating
systems.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER'S PERSONNEL:
A. Prior to final inspection, instruct Owner's designated operating personnel in the
operation,adjustment and maintenance of products,equipment and systems. Provide
instruction at mutually agreed upon time.
END OF SECTION 01730
01730-3 Rev. 6/01
mom.
C-668
SECTION 02230
PAVING BASE COURSE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
and re grading of existing granular base for asphaltic concrete and
A. Construction
Portland Cement concrete paving.
B. Construction of full depth asphalt base for asphaltic concrete paving.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 02510 -Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
B. Section 02525 - Curbs and Sidewalks.
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition.
D698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort
(12,400 ft-Ibf/ft' (600kN.m/m ))
D1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method
D1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort
(56,000 ft-Ibf/ft' (2,700 Kn.m/m ))
D2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
D2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and
Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
D2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
D3017 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
D4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)latest
edition.
T88 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
02230-1 Rev. 6/01
W4
C-668 '
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Contractor shall retain an independent testing laboratory for testing of in-place base
, density, and
tolerances. Paving base course tolerances shall be verified by rod and level
course for compliance with requirements for thickness, compaction
readings
of not more than 50-ft. centers and shall not be more than 0.05-feet above subgrade
design elevation to allow for paving thicknesses as indicated on Constru
Drawings. Contractor shall provide instruments and suitable benchmark. coon ,
B. Following tests shall be performed on each type of material used as base se course
1• Moisture and Density Relationship: ASTM D 698 (or ASTM D 1557).
2. Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T 88. ..
3. Plasticity Index: ASTM D 4318.
4. Base Material Thickness: Perform 1 test equally spaced for every 10,000 sq ft.
of in-place base material.
5. Base Material Compaction: Perform 1 test equally spaced for each lift for each
10,000 sq.ft. of in-place base material.
6. Test each source of base material for compliance with applicable state highway
department specifications.
C. Field density tests for in-place materials shall be performed in accordance with one of
the following standards:
1• Sand-Cone Method: ASTM D 1556.
2. Balloon Method: ASTM D 2167. '
3. Nuclear Method: ASTM D 2992 (Method B-Direct Transmission).
D. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare reports that indicate test location,
elevation data, and test results. Owner, Engineer and Contractor shall be provided
with copies of reports within 96 hours of time test was performed. In the event that test
performed fails to meet Specifications,the Owner or his designated representative and
Contractor shall be notified immediately by the independent testing laboratory.
E. All costs related to retesting due to test failures shall be paid for by Contractor at no
additional expense to Owner. Owner reserves right to employ and independent testing
laboratory and to obtain a second opinion when deemed necessary. Contractor shall
provide free access to site for testing activities.
02230-2 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS:
A. Submit materials certificate to the independent testing laboratory which is signed by
materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed,
requirements specified.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Contractor shall verify that subgrade has been inspected, tested, and gradients and
elevations are correct, dry and properly prepared.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION:
A. Perform base course construction in manner that will drain surface properly and
prevent runoff from adjacent areas from draining onto base course construction.
B. Compact base material to not less than 98 percent of optimum density as determined
by ASTM D 698 (or 95 percent of optimum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557)
unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings.
C. Granular Base: Construct to thickness indicated on Construction Drawings. Apply in
lifts or layers not exceeding 6-inches, measured loose.
END OF SECTION 02230
02230-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 02510
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Preparation and placement of asphaltic concrete binder course.
B. Preparation and placement of asphaltic concrete surface course.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 02230 - Paving Base Course.
B. Section 02525 - Curbs and Sidewalks.
AM
C. Section 02580 - Pavement Markings.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. The Asphalt Institute (AI) latest edition
MS 2 Mix Design Methods for Asphaltic Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types
MS 3 Asphalt Plant Manual
MS 19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual
B. US Army Corps of Engineers
US-13 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving Handbook (CE MP-ET)
C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition
D 946 Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement Construction
D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using
Paraffin-Coated Specimens
D 1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall
Apparatus
D 2726 Specific Gravity of fine surface specimen
D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)latest
edition
M 116 Prime Coat water proofing (ASTM D 2027)
M 117 Mineral Filler 'Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing" (ASTM D 173)
M 140 Tack Coat "Anionic Emulsified Asphalt" (ASTM D 977)
02510-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
M 208 Tack Coat "Cationic Emulsified Asphalt" (ASTM D 2397) -
M 226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
T 245 Marshall Mix Design
T 209 Theoretical Maximum Density ,
E. APWA
Section 2204
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. An independent testing laboratory shall be retained by the Contractor to perform �.
construction testing of in-place asphaltic concrete courses for compliance with
requirements for thickness, compaction, and surface smoothness. Asphaltic surface
and base courses shall be randomly cored at a minimum rate of 1 core per 10,000
sq.ft. of paving. However, no less than 2 cores in light duty areas and 2 cores in
heavy duty areas shall be obtained. Coring holes shall be immediately filled with full-
depth asphaltic concrete. Asphaltic concrete pavement samples shall be tested for
conformance with mix design.
B. Establish and maintain required lines, grades and elevations. '
C. In-place compacted thickness shall not be less than thickness specified on
Construction Drawings. Areas of deficient paving thickness shall receive tack coat and
a minimum 1-in. overlay; or shall be removed and replaced to proper thickness, at
discretion of the Owner or his designated representative; until specified thickness of
course is met or exceeded at not additional expense to Owner.
D. Testing shall be performed on finished surface of each asphaltic concrete course for
smoothness, using a 10'-0" straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to „
direction of paving machine travel of paved area. Results of tests shall be made
available to the Owner or his designated representative upon request. Surfaces will
not be acceptable if the following 10-ft. straightedge tolerances for smoothness are
exceeded:
Leveling Course Surface: 1/4-in,
Wearing Course Surface: 3/16-in. eft
E. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and
replace unacceptable paving as directed by the Owner or his designated ""
representative.
F. Field density test for in-place materials shall be performed by examination of field cores
in accordance with one of the following standards:
1. AASHTO Test Method T245 (percent of laboratory density).
a. Temperature equal to temperature at paving machine without reheating.
02510-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
b. Compactive blows (35, 50 or 75) equal to mix design blows.
C. Minimum density = 96% of laboratory density.
2. AASHTO Test Method T209 (percent of theoretical maximum density).
a. Minimum density = 92% of theoretical maximum density.
Rate of testing shall be a minimum of 1 core per 10,000 sq.ft. of pavement, with a
minimum of 2 cores from heavy duty areas and 2 cores from light duty areas. Cores
shall be cut from areas representative of project.
Areas of insufficient compaction shall be delineated, removed, and replaced in
compliance with Specifications at no additional expense to Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Before asphaltic concrete paving is constructed, submit actual design mix to the
Architect or his designated representative for review and approval. Design mix
submittal shall follow format as indicated in Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2, Marshall
Stability Method; and shall include type/name of mix, gradation analysis, grade of
asphalt cement used,Marshall Stability in Ib. flow,effective asphalt content in percent,
and direct references to the applicable State Highway Department Specifications
sections for each material. Design shall be for mixture listed in current edition of the
applicable State Highway Department Specifications. Mix designs over 3 years old will
not be accepted.
B. Submit materials certificate to the independent testing laboratory which is signed by
materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed,
requirements specified herein.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
„ A. Weather Limitations:
1. Apply prime and tack coats only when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees
Fahrenheit, and when temperature has been::above 35 degrees Fahrenheit for
12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet,
contains excess moisture, or during rain.
2. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning
signs, and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
02510-3 Rev. 6101
R
C-668
A. Provide asphalt-aggregate mixture as recommended by local or state paving
authorities to suit project conditions. Use locally available materials and gradations
which meet application State Highway Department Specifications and exhibit
satisfactory records of previous installations.
B. Asphalt Cement: Comply with AASHTO M 226; Table 2 AC-10, AC-20, or AC-30,
viscosity grade, depending on local-mean annual air temperature. See chart below:
Temperature Condition Asphalt Grades
Cold, mean annual air temperature AC-10
at 45 degrees Fahrenheit or lower 85/100 pen.
Warm, mean annual air temperature AC-20
between 45 degrees Fahrenheit and 60/70 pen
75 degrees Fahrenheit
Hot, mean annual air temperature AC-30
at 75 degrees Fahrenheit or higher
C. Prime Coat: Medium curing cut-back asphalt or asphalt penetrating prime coat
consisting of either MC-30 or SS-1 h.
D. Tack Coat: Emulsified Asphalt:: AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208, SS-1 h, CSS-1,
or CSS-1 h, diluted with 1 part water to 1 part emulsified asphalt.
E. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying
with AASHTO M 117, if recommended by applicable State Highway Department
Specifications.
F. Asphalt-Aggregate Mixture:Type-III Mix shall have minimum stability based on 50-blow
Marshall complying with ASTM D 1559 of 1000 Ib. with flow between 8 and 16. „
2.2 EQUIPMENT:
A. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and prevent or correct `
breakdowns in manner that will not delay or be detrimental to progress of paving
operations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. Paving work
shall begin only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive
paving.
02510-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before
applying prime coat.
3.2 APPLICATIONS:
A. Prime Coat:
1. Apply bituminous prime coat to base material surfaces where asphaltic concrete
paving will be constructed.
2. Apply bituminous prime coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and
applicable State Highway Department Specifications.
3. Apply at a minimum rate of 0.25 gal. per sq. yd. over compacted base material
to thoroughly penetrate and seal, but not flood surface.
4. Take necessary precautions to protect adjacent areas from overspray.
5. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration of compacted base and
evaporation of volatile substances.
B. Tack Coat:
1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphaltic concrete base
courses or Portland Cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into
*! asphaltic concrete or into asphaltic concrete pavement.
2. Apply tack coat to asphaltic concrete base course or sand asphalt base course.
Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat between each lift or layer of full depth
asphaltic concrete and sand asphalt bases 'and on surface of bases where
asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed.
3. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and
applicable State Highway Department Specifications.
4. Apply at minimum rate of 0.05 gal. per sq. yd. of surface.
5. Allow to dry until al volatile substances have,evaporated and the surface is in
proper condition to receive paving.
3.3 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. Place asphaltic concrete mixture on completed compacted subgrade surface, spread,
and strike off. Spread mixture at following temperatures;
02510-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Ambient temperature between 40 degrees and 50 degrees Fahrenheit requires
a mixture temperature not less than 285 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Ambient temperature between 50 degrees and 60 degrees Fahrenheit requires °
a mixture temperature not less than 280 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Ambient temperature higher than 60 degrees Fahrenheit requires a mixture
temperature not less than 275 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Whenever possible, pavement shall be spread by finishing machine; however, ..,
inaccessible or irregular areas may be placed by hand methods. Hot mixture shall be
spread uniformly to required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, hot
mixture shall be carefully smoothed to remove segregated course aggregate and rake
marks. Rakes and lutes used for hand spreading shall be type designed for use on
asphalt mixtures. Loads shall not be dumped fasterthan they can be properly spread.
Workers shall not stand on loose mixture while spreading.
C. Paving Machine Placement:Apply successive lifts of asphaltic concrete in transverse
directions with surface course placed parallel to flow of traffic. Place in typical strips
not less than 10'-0"wide.
D. Joints:Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days and
work in manner that will provide continuous bond between adjoining work.
Construction joints shall have same texture,density,and smoothness as other sections
of asphaltic concrete source. Clean contact surfaces of joints and apply tack coat.
3.4 ROLLING AND COMPACTION:
A. Mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling as soon as it will
bear the weight of rollers without undue displacement. Number,weight,types of rollers
including direction and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that required
density and surface are consistently attained while mixture is in workable condition.
B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollers.
C. Breakdown Rolling:Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling
of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced
areas by loosening and filling with hot material.
D. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot.
Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.
E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of
roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained
specified density.
02510-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
F. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas that appear defective or that contain
foreign material. Cut out such areas and fill with resh, hot asphaltic concrete and
compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, erect barricades and do not permit vehicular traffic on
pavement until it has cooled, hardened and all volatile substances have evaporated.
END OF SECTION 02510
02510-7 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 02525
CURBS AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Preparation and placement of Portland Cement concrete curb.
B. Preparation and placement of Portland Cement concrete sidewalk.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
.. A. Section 02230 - Paving Base Course.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) latest edition
304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
305R Hot Weather Concreting
306R Cold Weather Concreting
308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition
A 185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
A 497 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement
C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
C 42 Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
C 94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
C. FS TT-C-800-Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces.
02525-1 Rev. 6/01
A"
,w
C-668
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) latest edition AW
CRSI - MSP Manual of Standard Practice
CRSI 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports **
E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest
edition
AASHTO M 73
AASHTO M182
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Establish and maintain required lines, grades, and elevations.
B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and
replace unacceptable work as directed by the Owner or his designated representative.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit materials certificate to the independent testing laboratory which is signed by
materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed,
requirements specked herein.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning
lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Forms: Steel,wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.
Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or
laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Forms shall be of depth equal to
depth of curbing or sidewalk, and so designed as to permit secure fastening together
at tops. Coat forms with a nonstaining type of coating that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete.
B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish
in flat sheets, not rolls, unless approved by the Owner or his designated
representative.
am
C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40.
02525-2 Rev. 6/01 •w
.m
C-668
D. Concrete Materials:
1. Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150,Type 1 or 1A, Type III oe IIIA(high
early strength) may be used if specifically approved by the Owner or his
designated representative.
2. Course Aggregates conforming to 3/4" maximum to No. 4 minimum size.
3. Fine Aggregates conforming to ASTM C 33.
4. Water shall comply with ASTM C 94.
E. Joint Fillers: Resilient premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying
with ASTM D 1751 or FS HH-F-341, Type II, Class A.
F. Joint Sealers: Non-priming,pourable,self-leveling polyurethane. Acceptable sealants
are Sonnenbom "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant.. Sonnenbom Sonomeric CT 1
Sealant", Sonnenbom Sonomeric CT 2 Sealant', Mameco 'Vulkem 245", or
Woodmount Products "Chem-Caulk".
2.2 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING:
A. Design mix shall product normal weight concrete,consisting of Portland Cement,
aggregate,water-reducing admixture(when approved by the Owner or his designated
representative), air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following:
1. Compressive Strength:3,500 psi minimum at 28 days,unless otherwise indicated
on Construction Drawings.
2. Slump Range: 2 to 5-in. at time of placement.
3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. Paving work
shall begin only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive
paving.
B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm,smooth
surface immediately before placing concrete.
" 3.2 INSTALLATION:
02525-3 Rev. 6/01
Am
C-668
A. Form Construction: Am
1. Set forms to required lines,grades and elevations, rigidly braced and secured in
accordance with ACI 347.
2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and forms to
remain in place a minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement and finishing «�
operations.
3. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: ..
Top of forms not more than 1/8-in. in 10'-0".
Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-in. in 10'-0".
4. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required
to ensure separation from concrete without damage to concrete.
B. Reinforcement: Locate, place,and support reinforcement in accordance with CRSI 63
and CRSI 65.
C. Concrete Placement:
1. Place concrete in accordance with requirements of ACI 304R, 305R and 306R.
2. Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for line
and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened
condition at time concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed around
manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
3. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal
vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or other „
structural components. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of
reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse
joints. If interrupted for more than % hour, place construction joint that
corresponds to the established joint pattern when adjoining concrete paving.
Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement. Machine
placement must be at required cross section, line, grade, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If the Owner or his designated representative
determines results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete
as specified herein.
D. Joint Construction:
02525-4 Rev. 6/01 low
C-668
1. Transverse Contraction Joints: Concrete curb or combination concrete curb and
gutter shall be constructed as indicated on ',Construction Drawings. Joints
between sections shall be formed either by steel templates, 1/8-in. in thickness,
of length equal to width of curb and gutter, and with depth which will penetrate
not less than 2-in. below surface of curb and gutter, or by sawing as specified
in Section 02520 0.1 b to a depth of not less than 2-in. below surface of curb and
gutter. If steel templates are used, they shall be left in place until concrete has
set enough to hold it's shape, but shall be removed while forms are still in place.
,. 2. Longitudinal Construction Joints: Concrete curb or combination concrete curb
and gutter, where specified on Construction Drawings, shall be tied to concrete
pavement with Y.—in round deformed reinforcement bars of length and spacing
shown on Construction Drawings.
3. Transverse Expansion Joints: Concrete curb, combination concrete curb and
gutter, or concrete sidewalk shall have premolded joint filler cut to exact cross
section of curb, gutter, or sidewalk. Locate expansion joints at a maximum of
180'-0" o.c. and corresponding to established joint pattern when adjoining
concrete paving.
D. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than %-in or
more than 1-in. below finished surface where joint.sealer is indicated. Furnish joint
fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed,'wherever possible. Where more
than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.
E. Joint Sealants: Joints shall be sealed with approved exterior pavement joint sealants
and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING:
- A. After striking off and consolidating concrete,smooth surface by screeding,floating and
hand troweling. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.After
floating, test surface for trueness with 10'-0" straightedge. Distribute concrete as
required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide
continuous smooth finish.
B. Work edges of sidewalks,gutters,back top edge of curb,and formed joints with edging
tools, rounding edge to 3/16-in radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After
completion of floating and troweling, when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows::
Curbs,Gutters and Sidewalks:Broom finish by drawing fine-hair broom across surface
perpendicular to flow of traffic. Repeat operation as necessary to produce fine line
texture.
02525-5 Rev. 6/01
Am
,"
C-668
C. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal,
clean ends of joints and point up mirror honeycombed areas. Remove and replace
areas or sections with major defects, as directed by the Owner or his designated
representative. ,
D. Protect and cure finished concrete curb, curb and gutter or sidewalk using acceptable
moist-curing methods,more particularly described in"water-curing"section of ACI 308.
3.4 BACKFILL:
A. After concrete has set sufficiently,spaces on either side of concrete curb, combination
concrete curb and gutter, or concrete sidewalk shall be refilled to required elevation
with suitable material compacted.
3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:
A. Sweep concrete curb, curb and gutter or sidewalk and wash free of stains,
discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material prior to final inspection.
B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from curb,curt
and gutter or sidewalk for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic
is permitted, maintain all surfaces as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials. �»
END OF SECTION 02525
02525-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 02580
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Preparation and application of painted pavement markings.
B. Preparation and application of paint on curbs, guard posts, and light pole bases.
C. Preparation and application of preformed adhesive,pavement markings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 02510 -Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
B. Section 02525 - Curbs and Sidewalks.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. FS TTP-85E.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Paint shall be non-bleeding, quick-drying, alkyd petroleum based paint suitable for
traffic-bearing surface and shall meet FS TTP-85E,and be mixed in accordance with
manufacture's instructions before application or as required by applicable State
Highway Department Specifications, whichever is the more stringent.
B. Preformed adhesive pavement markings shall be ',Stamark Intersection Grade Tape
Series A420 as manufactured by 3M Traffic Control Materials Division, or approved
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
02580-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.1 PREPARATION: .
A. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
B. Where existing pavement markings are indicated on Construction Drawings to be
removed or would interfere with adhesion of new pavement markings, a motorized
abrasive device shall be used to remove markings. Equipment employed shall not
damage existing paving or create surface conditions hazardous to vehicle or
pedestrian traffic. Within public rights-of-way,the method of marking removal shall be
approved by appropriate governing authority.
3.2 APPLICATION:
A. Apply 2 coats of paint at manufacturer's recommended rate,without addition of thinner,
with maximum of 100 sq. ft. per gal. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. At sidewalk curbs and crosswalks, use straightedge to ensure
uniform, clean, and straight stripe.
B. Install preformed adhesive pavement markings according to manufacturer's
recommended procedures for the specified material.
C. Following items shall be applied in accordance with colors noted below:
1. Pedestrian Crosswalks: White.
2. Exterior Sidewalk Curbs, Light Pole Bases and Guardposts: Yellow.
3. Fire Lanes: Red or per local code.
4. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in opposite directions: Yellow.
5. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in the same direction: White.
6. Handicap Symbols: Blue or per local code.
7. Parking Stall Striping:Yellow, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings.
8. Traffic Flow Arrows: Yellow, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings.
END OF SECTION 02580
02580-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE'
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: Structural elements including slabs,
beams, masonry grout work, sills, columns, foundations, embedded items, sidewalks
and supervision of those items placed in or through'',the concrete by other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
�,. A. REFERENCES:
1. Applicable Specifications, Codes and Standards: (Latest Editions).
ACI 211: Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and
Heavyweight Concrete.
ACI 214: Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Concrete.
ACI 301: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
ACI 302: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
ACI 304: Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing Concrete.
ACI 305: Hot Weather Concreting.
ACI 306: Cold Weather Concreting.
ACI 315: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
ACI 347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.
3. American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM). All ASTM Standards shall apply
where appropriate.
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
a. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code.
b. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code and Reinforcing Steel.
5. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
W„ B. Workmanship: The Contractor shall furnish a full-time qualified foreman to oversee
and direct the construction of all formwork, reinforcing steel placement, and concrete
placement. The Contractor shall be responsible for correction of all work which does
not conform to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finish.
03300-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
Deficiencies shall be corrected as directed by the Architect and as called for herein, at
no cost to the Owner.
C. Concrete Testing Service: The Contractor shall employ a qualified independent
Testing Laboratory, approved by the Architect, to perform material evaluation tests,
quality control during construction, and to design the concrete mixes as specified.
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the
Architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material
stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be done at
Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be .�
done at the Contractor's expense.
D. Tests for Concrete Materials:
1. Regular Weight Aggregate-ASTM C33.
2. Portland Cement-ASTM C150.
E. Sources of materials must remain unchanged during the course of the work; any
variation in materials will require retesting.
F. Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified requirements may be
submitted in lieu of testing, when acceptable to the Architect, provided the proposed
materials have a satisfactory service record and have been tested within the past year
and such previous tests have met the specified requirements. Certificates of "
compliance for each material must be signed by the Contractor and supplier.
G. Advance Mix Design: ASTM C192;each class of concrete required for the job shall be -*
designed by the Testing Laboratory to determine the proper proportions of ingredients
to insure concrete of the desired strength, workability and durability. The maximum
permissible water cement ratio, based on a five inch slump shall be such as to produce ,.
a laboratory strength at least 15°x6 greater than the strengths specified. Advance mix
designs shall be submitted priorto the placing of any concrete on the job. Regardless
of the recommendations of the Testing Laboratory, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to furnish the strength and quality of concrete specified. Ultimate strength
has been used on this project.
H. Quality Control Tests During Construction: Concrete shall be sampled and tested for
adequacy of the design for strength, as a basis for acceptance of the concrete and for
shore removal. Test cylinders shall be made, stored and tested by the Contractor's
Testing Laboratory. Special provisions shall be furnished to protect the test cylinders
while on the job site. Handle and store carefully prior to testing. Concrete shall be
sampled and tested as follows:
1. Acceptance Test Specimen (ASTM C31): One set of four (4) standard test
cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store for laboratory cured
test specimens.
03300-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2. Field Stored Test Specimens(ASTM C31): One set of four (4) standard test
cylinders of shored concrete stored on job site, !until tests are required, as nearly
as possible under the same conditions as in-place concrete from which cylinders
were taken.
3. Compressive Strength Tests(ASTM C39): One set for each 30 cubic yards or
fraction thereof, for each class of concrete, placed in any one day or for each
2,400 square feet of surface area placed, whichever is less. One set for each
100 lineal feet of footing or one set per truck load. For acceptance tests, break
1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days using average strength of the two and with
one held in reserve. Field stored cylinders shall be taken in same manner as
acceptance cylinders, except they shall be taken only from those portions of the
structure which are shored or braced. To check time for removing shores, break
one cylinder at a time until required strength is reached. When the strength of
field stored cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders,
evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing in-place concrete.
4. Tests of In-Place Concrete: The Testing Laboratory shall make additional tests
of in-place concrete when results indicate to the Architect that specified concrete
strengths or other characteristics have not been met. Tests may consist of cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C42,or, if these tests are not conclusive, by load
test performed in accordance with Chapter 20 of ACI Standard 318-88. The cost
of all such tests shall be at Contractor's expense.
5. Reports: Report all test results to the Owner, Structural Engineer, Contractor
and Architect immediately after tests are made. Report tests of materials and
advance concrete mix designs before job concrete work is started. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete place, name of Contractor, name of supplier, truck
number, name of testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete
batch in structure, design compressive strengths at 28 days, compressive
breaking strength, type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests, entrained air
content, slump, air temperature,weather, and any water added after leaving the
plant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only,submit two(2)copies of the manufacturer's
data with application and installation instructions for all proprietary materials and items
relative to the concrete work.
B. Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings of fabrication and
placement of all reinforcing. Include bar schedules, stirrup spacing and arrangement
and concrete cover. Provide full information for placement without reference to design
drawings. Show all walls in elevation at a scale of not less than 1/4"= V-0". Show all
openings which interrupt reinforcing, including special reinforcing. Coordinate
openings with HVAC, Electrical and Plumbing Contractors. Show all areas fully. Do
03300-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
not use "similar' or"opposite hand" notations. Approval of Shop Drawings does not
constitute authorization to vary from Contract Drawings. All placement work must be
checked against the Contract Drawings,and details shall be checked by the Contractor
and show the Contractors approval and the initials of the checker before they are
submitted to the Architect for approval. If required dimensions or necessary details are
not clearly shown on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall circle and question
them on the Working Plans. These dimensions and details will be checked or
furnished by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS:
A. Concrete: 3000 PSI @ 28 days. "
B. Cement: Portland Cement-ASTM C150, Type I.
C. Coarse Stone Aggregate: Crushed stone, rock or gravel meeting requirements of
ASTM C33 and graded in accordance with Table II as follows:
1. All Concrete - 57.
2. All aggregate for exposed concrete shall be from the same source.
D. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp silica or quartz sand meeting all requirements of ASTM
C33 and having a fineness modulus between 2.3 and 3.0.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, potable. *90
F. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
4"
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 PROPORTIONS:
A. All concrete shall be accurately proportioned by weight so as to give an ultimate
compressive strength of 3000 PSI at 28 days. •�
B. Proportions: The proportions of materials shall be such as to produce concrete that
can be readily puddled into the comers and angles of the forms and around the
reinforcement without segregation or undue accumulation of water or laitance on the
surface. Water/cement ratio shall be held to the minimum consistent with proper
placing and finishing. The amount of mixing water used shall take into account the
moisture, or lack of the same, in the aggregate and liquid admixtures used. In no case
shall concrete be placed which has a slump outside the following limits:
1. Foundations -2"to 4"
2. Slabs and Beams -2"to 4" no
03300-4 Rev. 6/01 jw
C-668
3. Walls and Columns -3"to 5"
C. Admixtures:
1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, unless specifically shown otherwise.
Add air-entraining admixtures at the manufactorer's prescribed rate to result in
,• concrete at the point of placement having an entrained air content within the
following limits for regular stone concrete: -4% to 6%.
2. Use water-reducing admixtures in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
directions to increase cement dispersion and to provide increased workability of
low-slump concrete at Contractor's option, subject to Architect's acceptance.
4. Use retarding admixture only as previously specified.
5. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic
conditions prevailing at time of placing. Adjust quantities as required to maintain
quality control
3.2 CONCRETE MIXING:
A. Concrete shall not be placed if it has been in the mixer for more than one hour after
addition of the water, nor after concrete has begun to heat-up due to hydration.
B. Ready-Mix Concrete: Ready-mixed concrete shall be used and shall be mixed and
delivered in accordance with requirements set forth in the Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete (ASTM C94), and as noted above.
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. Comply with ACI-304, and as herein specified. Deposit concrete continuously or in
layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the
section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Clean all dowels of concrete before placing
new concrete.
B. Pre-Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the
formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be imbedded or cast-in. Notify
other crafts to permit the installation of their work;cooperate with othertrades in setting
such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing
concrete, as required, where form coatings are not used. Coordinate the installation
of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
Notify Architect of placing schedule at least 48 hours in advance.
C. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation,within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section
03300-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers.
Consolidate concrete in slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other
acceptable methods. Limit the time of vibration consolidation to prevent bringing an
excess of fine aggregate to the surface. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with
a straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving
it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water or cement on the plastic surface. ••R
Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Maintain
reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. If reinforcing
position is not maintained by Contractor, approved supports for all reinforcing will be
required (including slabs on grade).
END OF SECTION 03300
03300-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Requirements,
Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, (if any), along with the General
Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Work Included This Section:
1. Mortar for concrete masonry work.
2. Grout for built-in work in masonry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Cementitious Materials:
1. Masonry Cement shall conform to ASTM C 91.
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Hydrated Lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Fine Aggregate: Aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to requirements of ASTM
C 144.
D. Coarse Aggregate: Aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to requirements of
ASTM C 404.
E. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of alkalies, acids, or organic
materials.
F. Sand shall be White sharp sand.
2.2 MIXES:
A. Mortar for concrete masonry shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type S.
B. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476, Type PM.
04100-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Fine grout shall be used in spaces less than two inches (2") wide.
2. Coarse grout shall be used in spaces two to four inches (2"-4") in width.
3. Concrete shall be used in spaces over four inches (4") in width. Concrete shall
be 3000 psi concrete in accordance with CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, Section
03300.
PART 3 -EXECUTION:
3.1 Apply mortar according to Section 04210 and according to manufacturer's suggested
procedure.
•o
3.2 ' Water shall be clean potable water free from debris.
3.3 Provide inspection clean-out holes at the bottom of all cells with vertical reinforcement when OR
high-lift grouting (over 5 ft. high) is used.
3.4 Grout Testing: For each type of grout, prepare one set of four prism specimens for each 30 on
cubic yards or fraction thereof being placed each day.
Report test results in writing and in form specified under each test method to Architect and ow
Contractor, on same day tests were made.
Tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory under Contractor's
responsibility. Cost of those services shall be paid by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 04100
MIN
04100-2 Rev. 6/01 ..�
C-668
SECTION 04150
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1-GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide masonry accessories shown on the Drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit product data and installation instructions for each masonry
accessory required. Data shall show thickness, gauge and galvanized coating for
each type accessory.
B. Samples:
1. Submit one (1) sample of each accessory required if other than that specified.
Horizontal joint reinforcing sample length shall include two (2) cross rods and
one (1) box tie when box type is required.
2. Identify each sample with the Architect's Project Number and Project Title.
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Store accessories indoors and protect from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Fabricate wire accessories from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82,
zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A641, Class 2.
B. Fabricate sheet steel accessories from sheet steel,conforming to ASTM A525, zinc-
coated in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B2.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS:
A. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided the products furnished are
equal in gauge, thickness, strength and performance to the products specified:
1. AA Wire Products Company.
2. Dur-O-Wal Inc.
3. Heckman Building Products Co.
04150-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. •
5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Of America (Wire-Bond)
6. National Wire Products Corp.
7. Jim Taylor, Inc. (TY-Wal) .,
B. Products of AA Wire Products are specified to establish the basic type, design,
minimum thickness, gauge and size required. Products of other acceptable
manufacturers may be furnished provided products are equal in type and design
and meet requirements specified.
2.3 FINISH:
A. All accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class
B-2, 1.5 oz. per square foot.
2.4 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING (HJR):
A. Provide HJR fabricated of 3/16 inch deformed wire side rods and 9 gauge plain
cross rods flush welded to side rods. HJR may be ladder-type with perpendicular
cross rods welded at 16 inches on center, or truss-type with diagonal cross rods
welded at 16 inches on center. Provide in 10 foot straight lengths with matching L-
shaped comer pieces and T-shaped intersection pieces. Width shall be 1% inches
less than actual width of wall or partition or 2 inches less than nominal width of wall
or partition.
1. Single Wythe Walls and Partitions: Single side rods and ladder or truss
cross rods. Blok-Lok AA 500 or Blok-Truss AA 600.
2.5 BUCK AND FRAME ANCHORS:
A. Fabricated of 16 gauge minimum sheet steel, corrugated, with 2 inch, 90 degree
bend of T-end. AA 213, 214, or 215.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. All anchors, ties and reinforcing shall be solidly embedded in mortar. Where
anchors and ties extend over, into and across cells of hollow units, the cells shall be
filled solid with mortar, including the cells above and below the anchors and ties.
Anchors, ties and reinforcing shall be carefully positioned in the outer wythe so that
the metal is covered with no less than '/ inch thickness of mortar.
04150-2 Rev. 6/01 -•
C-668
3.2 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING (HJR):
A. Install the type indicated or specified in all masonry walls and partitions continuous
at 16 inches on center vertically starting 16 inches above footing or slab and ending
with the last mortar joint. In addition, install reinforcing in the first two mortar joints
above and below all openings, extending at least 24 inches beyond each side of the
opening. Install so that a cross rod or box tie occurs within 4 inches of all openings.
Lap all joints not less than 6 inches.
END OF SECTION 04150
04150-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide concrete masonry unit (CMU)work shown on Drawings and specified.
B. Concrete for lintels shall conform to requirements specified in Section 03300, Cast-
in-Place Concrete.
C. Horizontal joint reinforcing, ties, anchors and accessories are specified in Section
04150, Masonry Accessories.
D. Units shall be produced by one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform
texture and color.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Concrete masonry units and mortar for load-bearing walls shall conform to the
following standards:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 531-79.
2. ASTM Specifications referenced herein.
3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): TEK Notes Information
Series.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION:
A. Contractor shall employ and pay an independent Testing Laboratory to inspect
masonry construction. Testing Laboratory's field inspector shall verify compliance
with the Drawings and keep records of the following:
1. Quality control and testing of masonry units and materials for mortar, grout
and making of prisms.
2. Proportioning, mixing and consistency of mortar and grout.
3. Laying, mortar application and grouting of masonry units and masonry
structural elements.
4. Condition, grade, size, spacing and placing of reinforcement and accessories.
5. Any significant or unusual construction loads on completed masonry structural
elements.
6. General progress of the masonry work.
04220-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F or rises above 100 degrees F,
a complete record shall be kept of weather conditions and of preconditioning and
protection given to masonry materials, and protection and curing of completed work.
C. Testing: Preformed prism tests to verify the compressive strength of the masonry
shown on the Drawings in accordance with ACI 531-79, Section 4.4.
D. Testing laboratory shall submit records of inspection and testing required herein to
the Architect.
E. Contractor shall notify Testing Laboratory fifteen (15) days prior to start of masonry .�
work.
F. The independent Testing Laboratory shall provide quality control procedures for all
masonry mortar in accordance with ASTM 780.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data for concrete masonry units and mortar materials.
B. Submit copies of certified test reports from an approved independent testing
laboratory to show compliance with requirements of ASTM C90. Certified test
reports shall be for tests performed in accordance with ASTM C140, Sampling and
Testing Concrete Masonry Units, and ASTM C 426, Drying Shrinkage of Concrete
Block. Tests shall have been performed not more than twelve (12) months prior to
delivery to the job site. ..
C. Units for Fire Rated Partitions: Submit certificate from concrete block producer
certifying that fire rated units conform to UL 618 and the requirements of the
Standard Building Code, Chapter 31, Table 3103.1 and Appendix P.
1.5 PROTECTION AND STORAGE:
A. Handle masonry units to prevent breakage; stack to provide adequate protection
and ventilation. Store cementitious and metal goods off the ground and in ,
waterproof sheds.
B. Provide adequate, watertight covers over masonry units to protect units at all times
from rain, dew, humidity, and any form of dampness. Keep covers in place during
rain and when work is not attended.
C. Store all masonry units off the ground and keep dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
04220-2 Rev. 6/01 ^
C-668
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high unless
otherwise indicated. Provide units in width(s) to construct wall thickness shown on
Drawings.
B. Special Shapes: Provide lintel units, comers, jambs and other special shapes to
complete the work.
C. Concrete Brick: May be used where not exposed to view for fill-in and where full
size units will not course out.
,. D. Curing: Curing masonry units may be air-, water-, or steam-cured.
1. Air-cured units shall be held in dry storage a minimum of 30 days before use.
2. Steam- or water-cured units shall be held in dry storage a minimum of ten (10)
days before use.
3. High-pressure and high-temperature steam-cured units may be used after
three (3) days dry storage.
E. Moisture Content: At time of installation, shall not exceed 35% of total absorption.
F. All units shall be made with the same aggregate.
G. Reinforcing Bars (Rebar): ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU):
A. Hollow Concrete Block: ASTM C90, Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units,
+�• Type ll, Grade N-1, Normal Weight.
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates.
3. Lime: ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime, Type S.
2.3 PRE-CAST CONCRETE LINTELS:
A. Provide U-block type reinforced lintels with bearing capacity stamped on sides. Fill
solid with grout.
2.4 MORTAR:
A. Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural gray color. Type III high-early-
strength may be used for laying masonry in cold weather.
2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 with 12% maximum air content by volume, non-
low
staining type.
04220-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
4. Aggregates: ASTM C144, clean, sharp, natural sand.
5. Water: Clean and potable.
B. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents.
C. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.
D. Mortar Mix: Mortar for all masonry not otherwise indicated shall conform to ASTM
C270, Type S mortar, 1,800 psi at 28 days. Proportions shall be by volume.
Aggregate shall be damp, loose sand measure. Provide one of the following:
1. Masonry Cement Mortar:
Portland Cement: % part
Masonry Cement: 1 part
Aggregate: Not less than 3%and not more than 4% parts
2. Cement-Lime Mortar:
Portland Cement: 1 part
Lime: %to '/ part
Aggregate: Not less than 3 and not more than 4 parts
E. Mortar for Fire-rated Walls: Conform to UL Design as follows:
1. Cement Lime Mortar:
Portland Cement: 1 part
Sand Aggregate: 3 parts
Lime: 15 percent of volume of cement
F. Mixing Mortar:
1. Do not use shovels for measuring mortar materials.
2. Use a measuring container of a calculated volume in cubic feet of the cement
and masonry cement to place all materials in mixer.
3. Thoroughly machine mix for a period of not less than three (3) minutes and
not more than five (5) minutes after all materials are in the mixer.
2.5 GROUT:
A. Grout for filling masonry cells and cavities shall conform to ASTM C476.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Masonry work shall be performed by experienced masons.
04220-4 Rev. 6/01 "
C-668
B. Layout masonry work, locate all openings, control joints, expansion joints, offsets,
comers and other items in advance of laying units so, that joints and bond pattern
are uniform.
C. Lay up walls, partitions, and other work plumb and true to line with courses level,
accurately spaced, and coordinated with other work.
D. Do not lay masonry in freezing weather unless suitable means are provided to heat
materials or heat areas of work. Protect work from cold and frost and ensure that
mortar will harden without freezing. No anti-freeze ingredient shall be used.
E. Protect facing material against staining and keep top of walls covered with non-
staining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. When work is
resumed, clean loose mortar from top surfaces. In hot drying weather, thoroughly
wet surfaces to receive masonry.
F. Reinforced Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Walls shall be laid in such a manner as to
preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of corep to be filled. Cross webs
adjacent to vertical core that are to be filled with grolut shall be fully embedded in
mortar, to prevent leakage of grout. Mortar fins protruding from joints shall be
removed before grout is placed; the minimum clear dimensions of reinforcing shall
be rigidly secured in place at vertical intervals not to exceed 160 bar diameters.
Horizontal reinforcing shall be embedded in grout as grouting proceeds. The
minimum clear distance between masonry otherwise, splices shall be formed by
lapping bars not less than 20 bar diameters and wire tying them together. Masonry
units shall be filled with grout for a maximum height of five (5) feet in one vertical lift
unless clean-out holes are provided at the bottom of each cell filled.
3.2 BUILT-IN WORK:
A. Coordinate masonry work with other trades to avoid cutting and patching. Install
built-in items for masonry work and other trades as the work progresses. Set
flashing, loose lintels, anchors, bearing plates, access doors, rough hardware,
grounds, blocking, inserts and similar items in beds of mortar.
B. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cells of CMU, place metal lath in the
joint below and fill cell with mortar.
C. Fill hollow metal frames solid with mortar as the courses are laid-up. Set anchors in
mortar as indicated.
3.3 JOINTS AND BOND:
A. Joints: Make joints % inch average, not over'h inch with allowance for tolerance of
units.
04220-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Exposed joints compacted and tooled concave with a 36-inch long, one-inch "
O.D. joint tool.
2. Concealed joints and joints in masonry to receive stucco and plaster shall be
cut flush as work progresses. *
3. Where thin-set or monolithic type finish is to be applied direct to masonry
units,joints shall be compacted, filled, cut flush and rubbed smooth with a
sponge float.
4. Rake joints out to form groove where indicated for caulking and sealants.
B. Bond:
1. Running Bond: Lay units in running bond unless otherwise indicated. Vertical
joints shall be centered over units above and below.
2. Stack Bond: Provide stacked bond where indicated. All vertical joints shall be
in line and plumb vertically. Joints shall be raked Sia inch as detailed.
3.4 MORTAR APPLICATION:
A. Use and place mortar in final position within 2% hours after mixing. Discard all
mortar not used within this limit.
B. Mortars that have stiffened within 2% hours after mixing because of evaporation
from moisture from the mortar may be retempered to restore workability by adding
water as frequently as needed to restore the required consistency.
3.5 INSTALLATION:
A. Surfaces to receive masonry shall be clean, smooth and free of standing water.
B. Lay units in full beds of mortar on horizontal and vertical face shells only for units
above first course in walls and partitions. Webs shall be bedded in mortar in first
course on footings, slabs and all courses in columns, piers and pilasters, and where
cells are to be filled with grout or concrete.
C. Provide expansion joints where indicated and control joints as recommended by
NCMA. ..�
D. Reinforcing, Anchors and Ties: Install where indicated and specified in Section
04150, Masonry Accessories. .�
E. Bond each course at comers and wall and partition intersections with masonry
bond. Intersections may be bonded with metal anchors specified in Section 04150, -•
Masonry Accessories.
04220-6 Rev. 6/01 r
C-668
F. Unless otherwise indicated, walls and partitions shall extend to the underside of
construction above. Wedge units of last course in place and fill with mortar. After
mortar is set, remove wedges and fill voids with mortar.
G. Cutting of units shall be with power-driven masonry saws. Cuts shall be square,
clean, straight lines without chipping.
H. Finishing:
1. Cut mortar and clean mortar from masonry faces as the work progresses.
2. Tool joints as soon as mortar is thumbprint hard.
3. Pointing: Inspect all masonry carefully; point up to fill nail holes, crevices and
incompletely filled joints. Point before waterproofing or dampproofing.
3.6 CLEANING:
A. Remove mortar fins, smears and mortar spatter. Clean free of fungi, efflorescence
and other deposits.
B. Use wire brushes, trowels or other tools that will not,damage surfaces of units and
joints.
C. Surfaces shall be suitable for painting or other indicated finish.
END OF SECTION 04220
04220-7 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work as shown on
Drawings, including schedules, notes and details showing size and location of
members, typical connections and types of steel required.
B. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC) Code of Standard Practice and as otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Miscellaneous metal fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5.
D. Refer to Division 3, Concrete, for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4,
Masonry, for anchor bolt installation in masonry.
• 1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data or Manufacturer's Specifications and Installation Instructions for
following Products: Include laboratory test reports and other data to show
compliance with Specifications (including specified standards).
1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering
chemical physical properties.
2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts'and washers. Include direct
tension indicators if used.
3. Structural steel primer paint.
4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
C. Shop Drawings shall be prepared under the supervision of a licensed Structural
Engineer, including complete details and schedules'for fabrication and assembly of
structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts,
connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard
AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld. Provide setting
drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchorages to be installed as work of other Sections.
D. Test Reports Conducted on Shop-and Field-Bolted and -Welded Connections:
Include data on types of tests conducted and test results.
05120-1 Rev.6/01
C-668
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise
indicated:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges. ~l
a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the
following sentence: °This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance
of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of �»
connections developed by the fabricator as part of his preparation of
these Shop Drawings".
2. AISC Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, including Commentary.
3. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts
approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Welding Code-Steel.
5. ASTM A6 General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use.
B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Quality welding procedures and welding operators
in accordance with AWS Qualification requirements. Provide certification that
welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests.
If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-
place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials form erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts
become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. Do not store materials on
structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or
supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
PART 2 -MATERIALS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use
only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust
05120-2 Rev.6/01
C-668
and scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove
such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating
and applying surface finishes.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
" C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, non-headed type unless otherwise indicated.
D. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy
hexagon nuts and hardened washers as follows: Quenched and tempered
medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325.
E. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, type as required. Use at Contractor's
option.
F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
G. Non-Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive,
non-staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-
CRD-C621.
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in
shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance
with AISC Specifications and as indicated on Final $hop Drawings. Provide camber
in structural members where indicated. Properly mark and match mark materials for
field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and
minimize field handling of materials. Where finishing is required, complete
assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide
finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs and
other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated. Bolt field connections
except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. Provide high-
strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections, except where unfinished
bolts are indicated. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted
connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins,
girls and other framing members taking only normal stresses) and for temporary
bracing to facilitate erection.
C. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in
accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts.
05120-3 Rev.6/01
C-668
D. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and
quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work.
E. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural
steel framing and for passage of other work through steel.framing members as
shown on final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other
specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill or punch holes
perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by
burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING:
A. Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be
embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on
exposed portions and initial two (2) inches of embedded areas only. Do not paint
surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. Apply
two (2) coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
B. Painting: Provide a one-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint System Guide No. 7.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: "°
A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in
mill, shop and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections
and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and
fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Promptly remove
and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply. '
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical. Similar details
apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site
whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify Architect
whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not
clearly indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 ERECTION:
A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing
members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove
temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and
final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper
alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
05120-4 Rev.6/01
C-668
B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as
necessary to effectively complete work.
C. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces
of bond reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom
surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and
bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing
surfaces and bases or plates to insure that no voids remain. Finish exposed
surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout
materials comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to'lines and elevations indicated.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame and structure
before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will
be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to
• compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb
individual members of structure within specified AISO tolerances. Splice members
only where indicated and accepted on Shop Drawings.
E. Erection Bolts: Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins,
except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit
bolts.
F. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors
in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on.secondary members
that are not under stress, as acceptable to the Structural Engineer. Finish gas-cut
sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.
G. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using
same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not
in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests at Contractor's expense
as necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and to show
compliance of corrected work.
05120-5 Rev.6101
«o
C-668
B. Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC Specifications.
Verify that gaps of installed direct tension indicators are less than gaps specified in
ASTM F959, Table 2.
C. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies as
follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types
and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed
to correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform tests of welds as follows: Inspection procedures listed are to be used
at Contractor's option.
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709. Performed on root pass and
on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration
not acceptable.
C. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94 and ASTM E142; minimum quality
level "2-2T ,
d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.
4. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC Specifications.
For direct tension indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F 959. Verify
that gaps are less than gaps specked in Table 2.
5. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel. Certify
welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to
correct deficiencies. Perform visual inspection on all welds. Perform
ultrasonic inspection of welds in accordance with ASTM E164 for column
moment splices.
END OF SECTION 05120
05120-6 Rev.6/01
C-668
SECTION 05440
LIGHT-GAUGE STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide light-gauge steel framing shown on Drawings and specified.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
A. Provide metal studs, runners, bracing, furring and fasteners as required for
complete installation of interior wall framing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
item of light-gauge framing and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate each framing member with size, type and gauge
designations, quality, location and spacing. Indicate and detail type of connections,
anchorage to structure, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, splices, bridging,
accessories and other compounds and details required for proper installation.
1.4 STANDARDS:
A. Component Design: Structural properties of steel members shall be in accordance
with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members.
1.5 FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES:
Am A. Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance
rating required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units that have
been approved by governing authorities that have jurisdiction.
05440-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide light-gauge metal framing of one
of the following:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. (CSI)
3. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. ,
4. Superior Steel Studs, Inc.
5. Dale/Incur Industries, Inc.
6. Goldbond Building Products .�
7. U.S. Gypsum
8. Steel-Con
2.2 METAL FRAMING:
A. System Components: Provide manufacturer's standard non-load bearing framing ,
members. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's
standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements,
fasteners, anchorages, accessories and other components as recommended by
manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal ..
framing system.
B. Materials and Finishes:
1. Provide gauge, width and heights of framing as indicated on the plans. All
components shall be of commercial quality steel sheet with minimum yield
point of not less than 33,000 psi; ASTM A446, A570 or A611.
2. Provide galvanized finish to all metal framing components and accessories. "
For sheet metal components, comply with ASTM A525 for minimum G60
coating. For structural steel shapes, provide galvanized coating complying
with ASTM A123. For hardware, galvanized coating complying with ASTM
A153.
C. C-Shape Studs: Manufacturer's steel C-shape studs of size indicated and of -
gauge and structural properties required. Provide flanges of proper bearing area
and type for attachment of materials.
D. Furring: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped steel furring members of gauge and .�
structural properties required.
E. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant plated steel or stainless steel.
05440-2 Rev. 6/01 .�
C-668
2.3 GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT:
A. Galvicon, ZRC or approved equal.
" 2.4 FABRICATION:
A. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate
panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.
Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner! o prevent damage or distortion.
B. Fastenings: Attach components by welding, bolting or screw fasteners, as
standard with manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with approved Shop
Drawings and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Temporary bracing of walls and other light-gauge framing shall be provided during
erection until such time it is no longer needed.
C. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks
accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by
manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c.
spacing for powder-driven fasteners, or 16 inches o.c. for other types of
attachment. Provide fasteners at comers and end of tracks.
D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing.
E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to
supporting structure.
F. Install supplementary framing, wood blocking and bracing in metal framing system
wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the
wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated,
comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards,
considering weight or loading resulting from items supported.
G. Stud Wall System: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding
or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges.
05440-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
H. Frame wall opening larger than two (2) feet square with double stud at each jamb of
frame where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's
instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings.
Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs `
same as full height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame.
END OF SECTION 05440
05440-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work specified in this Section includes structural formwork, sheathing and
miscellaneous ground, blocking and furring, and associated hardware.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Factory mark each piece or each bundle of lumber and plywood with the type,
grade, mil and grading agency identification. Materials shall be graded as follows:
1. Framing (Dimensional) Lumber SPIB per ASTM D245
2. Plywood APA per ASTM D2555-66T
3. Connectors ASTM D1761
4. Pressure-Treated Wood AWPI LP-2'
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE:
NO A. Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber to provide
air circulation and protect against direct contact with damp or wet surfaces.
1.4 COORDINATION:
A. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar deadwood so
that attached work will comply with design requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 FRAMING STUDS AND PLATES:
A. Lumber shall be of standard nominal size and be No.2 Southern Pine,surfaced dry(19% maximum moisture content).
2.2 STRUCTURAL FRAMING LUMBER:
A. Six (6) inch and wider and from 2" to 4" thick. Provide No.1 grade Southern Pine
(F6 1499 psi minimum).
2.3 PLYWOOD:
06100-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Plywood for sheathing and subflooring shall be exterior grade (CDX) Fir plywood '
in thickness shown. Backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment shall be
fire-retardant treated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
A. Provide wood supports and attachments for other work using standard grade light
framing size lumber as required, any species.
2.5 FRAMING HARDWARE:
A. Provide proper type, size, material and finish required for each application.
B. Framing Hardware shall be mill galvanized, have code approval and conform to
ASTM A446-75, Grade A or better and as follows:
1. Joist Hangers: Simpson galvanized steel. See the Drawings for sizes and
gauges.
2. Miscellaneous Angles, Clips, and Plates: Simpson Galvanized Steel. (See
Drawings).
3. Truss Anchors: Simpson Galvanized Steel. (See Drawings).
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 QUALITY:
a. Discard material which is unsound,warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or
seasoned,or too small to fabricate the work with a minimum of joints. At carpentry,
work accurately to required levels and lines with members plumb and true. Shim
with suitable materials as required for full bearing on concrete or masonry "
substrates.
3.2 ATTACHMENT:
A. Securely attach carpentry work by anchoring and fastening as shown or required
by recognized standards. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact
with wood. Countersink nails on exposed carpentry work and fill voids.
3.3 FASTENERS: ^"
A. Nails: Use galvanized annular ring shank nails for framing hardware and
connectors, hot dipped galvanized where exposed to exterior, mill galvanized for
otherwet locations and common wire nails elsewhere unless otherwise noted. Use
finishing nails for exposed work.
06100-2 Rev. 6/01
M.
C-668
B. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite will be
exposed or will receive finish materials.
C. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of
wood -predrill as required. Do not drive threaded friction-type fasteners, turn into
000 place. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and re-tighten as required for
good connection prior to closing in or at completion of work.
3.4 SHEATHING:
A. Nail plywood to comply with the recommendations of the American Plywood
Association and as required for wind shear as required by the Standard Building
Code and Hurricane Resistant Manual.
B. Install plywood roof decking to wood roof members as recommended by roofing
manufacturer or truss manufacturerto achieve an,adequate diaphragm and provide
panel clips to sheathing between truss supports.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD:
A. Miscellaneous wood framing blocking,nailers,grounds,sleepers,furring and shims
shall be installed where indicated or required. Attach to substrates with suitable
loading, (e.g., toilet partitions, grab bars, toilet accessories, electrical panels and
transformers.
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT:
A. Miscellaneous support and fastening of prefabricated trusses, glulam columns
and/or beams and similar items shall be constructed in accordance with other
Sections in this Specification, or, in the absence thereof, as recommended by the
items manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 06100
06100-3 Rev. 6/01
Pp
C-668
SECTION 06192
Aw PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide prefabricated wood trusses and prefabricated truss type units required and
indicated. Units shall be shop assembled, fabricated of dimension lumber with metal
plate connectors.
B. Provide girder trusses where required or indicated.
C. Provide type(s) of prefabricated wood truss units indicated on Drawings.
D. Fabricator is responsible for design of trusses for spacing, loads and design criteria
indicated on Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the
following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications:
1. Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.
2. Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood
Trusses.
3. Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses.
4. Quality Control Manual.
5. Truss Fabricator:
a. Provide trusses by fabricator which participates in TPI Quality Control
Inspection Program as a licensee authorized to apply TPI marks to
trusses.
b. Fabricator shall engage a registered Structural Engineer to design
trusses. Structural Engineer shall be registered in the State where
project is located.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Shop Drawings for each type truss showing species, sizes, lumber grade,
pitch, span, camber, design loads, location of metal connector plates and bearing
and anchorage details.
1. Submit design calculations.
06192-1 Rev. 10/99
C-668
2. Shop Drawings and design calculations shall be signed and sealed by a
registered Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the State where trusses
are fabricated.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle and store trusses in accordance with TPI recommendations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS:
2.1 LUMBER:
A. Mark each piece of lumber in the mill with type, grade, mill and grading agency.
B. Provide kiln-dried lumber with a maximum moisture content of 19% at time of
fabrication.
C. Lumber Species: Southern Yellow Pine, graded by SPIB.
D. Lumber Grade: Provide grade required to conform to truss design for stresses and
loads required. Provide S4S lumber, No. 2 structural grade, minimum.
E. Stress Rating: Provide lumber which has been graded or tested and certified, at
indicated moisture content, to have the stress rating to conform to fabricator's
design.
2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES:
A. Material: Sheet steel, not less than 0.036 inch thick. Provide plates fabricated of:
1. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, Coating G 60. .�
B. Hurricane Anchors: Fabricate of galvanized steel sheet designed for wind up-lift
indicated. Provide nails for anchoring recommended by anchor manufacturer.
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes with tight wood-to-wood
bearing joints in assembled units.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, shape, gauge and detail required for
structural designs required.
C. Assemble truss units using jigs to ensure uniformity and accuracy. Position .«
members to produce design camber indicated.
06192-2 Rev. 10/99
C-668
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates accurately located and securely
fastened to wood members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 ERECTION:
A. Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and
Truss Plate Institute with plane of truss web vertical (plumb) and parallel to each
other. Locate accurately at spacings indicated.
B. Hoist units in place by lifting equipment, applied at lift points recommended by
fabricator. Exercise care not to damage truss members of joints by out-of-plane
bending.
C. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel until
permanent bracing is installed.
» D. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points to comply with methods and details
indicated. Anchor each wood to wood bearing with two hurricane anchors.
.. E. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain
design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads. Install bottom
chord bridging prior to installing roof sheathing. Bridging shall be two 2 x 4
members continuous at 1/3 points minimum, nailed securely to each bottom chord
member.
F. Provide a ridge member, same size as top chord, cut between each truss member
and nailed securely.
G. Do not cut or remove truss members.
END OF SECTION 06192
06192-3 Rev. 10/99
ON
C-668
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, (if any), along with the
General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 SCOPE: Work included in this Section includes all finish carpentry work and related items
necessary to complete the work indicated on the Drawings and/or described in the
Specifications.
1.3 Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work
is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work,and to comply with protection and storage
requirements
1.4 Installer must examine the substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under
which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
1.5 Correlate location of furring, nailers,blocking,grounds and similar supports to that attached
work will comply with design requirements.
1.6 Furnish all items shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Finish carpentry includes all
woodwork exposed to view in finished building.
1.7 The Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute(A.W.I.)Custom Grade shall
apply, and by reference, are made a part of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Moisture Content: Lumber shall be air-dried or kiln-dried. The maximum moisture
content of interior finish and millwork and treated or untreated finish lumber, trim and
siding shall be 15% at the time of delivery to the job site.
B. Plywood:
06200-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Mouldings: White Pine or Poplar, clear for stained applications. Finger joint
allowed for painted surfaces. Sizes and profiles as indicated on the Plans.
Based on Brown Moulding Company Product information.
2. Plywood for Shelving: Group 1, Type III, Good grade, A-A face veneers where
both sides are exposed, A-D where one side only is exposed with hardwood
edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 Finished carpentry materials and work shall be carefully protected from damage during
transit, storage and after erection until Final Completion and Acceptance of the building.
3.2 Fasteners shall be concealed where possible. Where surface fastening is necessary,
fastener heads shall be countersunk with holes plugged to match the finished surface.
Finishing nails, where required, shall be well set for puttying.
3.3 Mitered comers shall have full surface contact throughout its length and flushness tolerance
within a maximum of 0.015". Only flush or rounded edge trim shall be sanded at the joints.
3.4 Machine doors for hardware as required by the Hardware Schedule.
3.5 All interior standing and running trim shall be plugged, puttied and sanded prior to application
of finish stain.
END OF SECTION 06200
06200-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 06420
PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide and install all plastic laminate casework, countertops, shelving and
accessory items specified herein or as noted on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Rough Carpentry and Finish Hardware.
B. Rubber, vinyl or other finished toe base.
C. Blocking with walls shall be coordinated with General Contractor.
D. Sinks, fittings, traps, stops, tail pieces, vacuum breakers, and other fixtures,
electrical and mechanical runs and connections.
E. Fixture installation/service connections: Setting and installation of equipment and
fixtures, and related utility connections, are providedunder the other Sections of the
Project Specifications governing that utility.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. Show
materials, dimensions, cabinet cut details, and sink locations.
B. Samples of colors shall be submitted for selection and coordination. Architect may
request and retain samples and catalog cuts as required for accessory and special
items.
1.4 REFERENCES:
AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association
APA: American Plywood Association
NBFU: National Board of Fire Underwriters
ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials
FS: Federal Specifications
06420-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Decorative laminate casework shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements 40
established by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Quality Standards for
"Custom Grade" Casework. Specific requirements set forth within this Specification
shall take precedence over the AWI standard.
B. Casework must conform to design, quality of materials, design intent, workmanship
and exact performance function of casework components and details specified and
shown on the Plans.
C. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of at least five (5) years
experience and installations for similar type of project. Manufacturers shall also
show evidence of financial stability, plant facilities, and provide sample cabinet for
review by Architect.
D. The Architect's opinion and decision shall be final in the evaluation of
manufacturers' products for approval to bid or award of contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 LAMINATED PLASTICS/FINISHES:
A. High-Pressure plastic laminate, 0.028" in thickness, for exterior cabinet surfaces
shall exceed NEMA Standard LD#-1985 for GP28 vertical grade laminate. See also
Section 2.08. Equal to the following:
1. Wilsonart
2. Nevamar
3. Formica
4. Pionite
B. Color Selection Available:
1. Textured finish vertical surface grade from casework manufacturer's entire
color range.
C. Plastic Laminate Balancing Sheet: Nominal 0.018" plastic laminate backing sheet
for reverse face of finished ends, door and drawer fronts shall be textured surface,
and meet NEMA standards to properly balance face finish.
D. Countertop High-Pressure Plastic Laminate:
1. High-pressure plastic laminate, textured finish .050"thickness for self-edged
tops. Color as selected from Wilsonart, Formica or Pionite from entire range
of colors and patterns.
06420-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
E. Plastic-fused Laminate:
I. Where used throughout this Specification, pressure-fused laminate shall refer
to manufacturer's standard surfacing material for semi-exposed surfaces.
Pressure-fused laminate shall be interpreted to include either thermal-fused
melamine board that meets or exceed the performance standards of NEMA
LD301991 for GP-28 high pressure laminate or CL20 cabinet liner
permanently bonded to substrate. Fast cycle thermal-fused panels, vinyl
overlay, painted finishes and other surface types that do not meet these
requirements are not acceptable. All panels shall be of"BALANCED"
construction.
2. Pressure-fused laminate to be colorfast in choice of two manufacturer's
standard colors.
3. Manufacturer's standard-colored pressure-fused laminate shall be used for
semi-exposed cabinet interiors behind doors and drawers, interiors of all open
cabinets, and underside of wall cabinet.
2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE PARTICLEBOARD CORE "ULTR'A-CORE"
A. High performance 5 ply laminated particle board and solid wood veneer.
2.5 HARDWARE:
„ A. Hinges:
1. Salice ,Blum or equal European type concealed hinge with 125 degree
opening angle.
2. One pair per door to 48 inch height. One and one half pair with 48 inch in
height.
B. Pulls: All pulls shall comply with guidelines set forth under the Americans With
Disabilities Act, Federal Register Volume 56, No. 144, Rules and Regulations
numbered 4.25.4 and 4.27.4. The following options shall be available:
1. 5/16” Diameter x 4" brushed aluminum wire pull on solid brass core.
C. Drawer Slides:
1. Standard Drawers: Blum "Meta-Box" integral Self-closing design, epoxy
powder coated with positive instops, outstop an!d outkeeper to maintain
drawer in open position. Captive nylon rollers, both front and rear. Minimum
100 Ib. Dynamic load rating.
2. File Drawers: Full extension, 3-part progressive opening slide, minimum 100
• lb., zinc plated or epoxy coated at manufacturer's option.
06420-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: To be 5mm steel pin system with holes drilled at 1-1/4"
on center. Load rating to be minimum 200 lbs. Each support without failure.
Cabinet interior sides shall be flush, without shelf system permanent projection.
2.6 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS FOR CABINET CONSTRUCTION:
A. Sub-Base:
1. Cabinet Sub-Base: To be separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides to
floor), water-resistant nominal 1x4 pressure-treated lumber in wet areas and
3/4" plywood in non wet areas with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom.
Ladder-type construction, to form a secure and level platform to which
cabinets attach.
B. Cabinet Top and Bottom:
d"
1. Base and tall cabinet bottom and wall cabinet tops to be plastic laminate
matching cabinet body.
2. Body edges to be nominal .018 laminate or PVC, in color to match door
edging or adjacent laminate color of cabinet, as selected by Architect.
C. Cabinet Ends:
1. Manufacturer's standard-colored pressure-fused laminated particleboard
interior side, 3/4 inch thick with phenolic neutral colored backer sheet or
pressure-fused laminate on concealed side. Holes drilled for adjustable
shelves minimum of 32 mm on center.
2. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with GP28 high-pressure
plastic laminate.
3. Exposed edges to be nominal .018 PVC in color to match door edging or
adjacent laminate color of cabinet, as selected by Architect.
D. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves:
1. Manufacturer's standard colored pressure-fused laminated particleboard all
sides. in color to match door edging (or adjacent laminate color of cabinet) at
open interiors, or to match pressure-fused laminate at semi-exposed interiors.
E. Cabinet Backs:
1. Standard cabinet back to be minimum 1/4" plywood with laminated liner.
2. Exposed exterior backs to be 3/4 inch ultra-core faced with GP28 high-
pressure plastic laminate, balanced with CL20 cabinet liner at semi-exposed ,
interior faces.
06420-4 Rev. 6101
C-668
F. Door and Drawer Fronts:
1. Plastic laminated door and drawer fronts to be 3/4" inch thick Ultra-Core with
high pressure plastic laminate and with Manufacturer's standard .018", CL20
balancing sheet on interior face. Drawer fronts and hinged doors are to be
flush overlay design.
2. Edges to be 1 mm thick PVC or laminate, in color to match adjacent surfaces.
G. Drawers:
1. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub-front.
2. Sides, sub-front and back of drawers to be minimum % inch thick
Manufacturer's standard pressure-fused laminated 47 Ib. density particleboard
or Ultra-Core. Bottoms shall be minimum 1/4"thick plywood with laminated
liner.
3. Exposed top edge to be matching laminate.
4. Drawers shall be assembled using Manufacturer's standard construction
techniques.
H. Door/Drawer Spreaders: Provide minimum 3/4 inch x 4 inch x full width pre-finished
cabinet body spreaders immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer
horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions, and close off reveal. Front
edge to be nominal 1 mm PVC, color to match door ejdging or adjacent laminate
color of cabinet as selected by Architect.
I. Sink Cabinets: All sink cabinet tops, bottoms, ends, nailers, etc., shall be
constructed with 3/4" exterior grade plywood. Sink cabinet backs shall be minimum
1/4" plywood.
2.7 COUNTERTOPS:
A. 1-1/2"thick self-edged style countertops to be constructed from GP50 high-
pressure plastic laminate bonded to a 3/4" plywood or Ultra-Core built up to 1-1/2"
at front and rear edges by means of a minimum 3/4"x 2" plywood. Underside to be
" properly balanced with heavy-gauge backing sheet. 'Edges to be 0.050 plastic
laminate to match tops. Provide continuous tops for counter-type cabinets fixed in
a line. If line of cabinets contains any plumbing fixture, entire top and splash shall
be constructed of exterior grade plywood in lieu of particleboard.
2.8 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Laminate surface/backer to core under controlled conditions, by approved and
regulated laminated methods to assure a premium lamination.
06420-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium grade quality
joinery construction utilizing automatic machinery to insure consistent sizing of
modular components.
C. All cases shall be square, plumb, and true.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 COORDINATION: •
A. Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other Sections as necessary to
obtain proper installation of all items.
B. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Storage and Protection: Casework shall be protected in transit. Store under cover in
a ventilated building not exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes.
Do not store or install casework in buildings until concrete, masonry and
drywall/plaster work is dry.
B. Workmen: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturers
representative with factory trained mechanics authorized by manufacturer.
..t
C. Workmanship:
1. Erect casework straight, level and plumb and securely anchor in place. Scribe OR
and closely fit to adjacent work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, etc.
2. Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts to operate properly.
3. Leave surface clean and free from defects at time of final acceptance.
D: Guarantee: All materials shall be guaranteed for a period of five (5) years from
manufacturer's defects and workmanship.
E. Clean-Up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc., and leave spaces
clean and all casework ready for Owner's use.
F. Seal splash at intersection of countertops with matching color sealant. Bevel all
sharp edges, and adjust all cabinet doors and glides for proper fit and operation
prior to Final Completion.
END OF SECTION 06420
06420-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 07193
PLASTIC VAPOR BARRIER'
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work includes plastic vapor barrier beneath concrete slabs.
1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Delivery of Materials: Materials shall be delivered to the project site in
manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's brand name
clearly marked thereon.
B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area and protected from damage.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. No vapor barrier shall be applied in wet weather, nor when the threat of rain exists
within 12 hours. The temperature shall be 40 deg,rees F,or above,with no chance
of freezing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
„ 2.1 MEMBRANE:
A. Polyethylene film, 6 mil thickness, complying with:Fed. Spec. UU-P-790, CS-238-
61. Test data indicating compliance maybe required. Maximum vapor permeance
shall not exceed % perm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES:
A. Preparation: The sub-grade shall be smoothed to prevent protrusions that may
cause damage or rupturing of the film.
B. Start of Work: The beginning of application work shall imply acceptance of the
surfaces to receive vapor barrier for that area by the Contractor.
3.2 APPLICATION:
07193-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. The widest practical seamless widths of natural polyethylene film should be applied
by laying it on the sand surface with twelve(12)inch minimum laps with the top lap
placed in the direction of the spreading of the concrete. All laps shall be sealed
with approved mastic. Pipes shall be taped where they penetrate slabs,to prevent
radon gas from entering building.
END OF SECTION 07193
07193-2 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 07210
GLASS FIBER INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide glass fiber building insulation specified and indicated on Drawings. Building
insulation includes the following types:
1. Batt-type glass fiber insulation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance and flammability ratings required
by governing codes and regulations.
B. Thermal Resistance: R-Values specified are for thermal resistance R-value at 75° F,
for each material. Provide adjusted thickness to provide R-value specified when
equivalent materials having a different thermal resistance are proposed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for each type of insulation, adhesive,tape and
mechanical anchors, including installation instructions.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Protection: Keep insulation materials dry. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling,storage and protection. Protect plastic insulation from
exposure to sunlight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 GLASS FIBER BATT INSULATION:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed.
2. Schuller/Manville.
3. Owens-Coming.
07210-1 Rev. 6/01
..a
C-668
B. Type and Class of Insulation: Faced and Unfaced fiberglass batts. Insulation surface
burning characteristics shall be Flame Spread 25 or less and Smoke Developed 50,
ASTM E 84.
1. Metal Studs: Provide friction fit.
C. R-Value:
1. R-11: 3'/2", un-faced, in all interior walls for sound attenuation.
2. 1-1/2"foil-faced rigid fiberglass board at exterior walls.
3. R-11: 3-1/2" un-faced Batts over toilet room for sound attenuation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for each type
insulation for each type application.
B. Thickness: Extend insulation full thickness over entire area as specified or indicated
on Drawings. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation.
1. Provide batt insulation in single layer of required thickness.
2. Provide sound attenuation batts at all interior partitions from slab to underside of
sub ceiling as shown on Drawings. •
3.2 GLASS FIBER BATT INSULATION:
A. Install insulation with vapor barrier to warm-in-winter side of construction except as
indicated on Drawings. Seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding
construction so as to ensure vapor-tight installation.
B. Attach to wood with staples.
C. Attach to steel studs and members with duct tape. Tape shall be two inches wide and
six inches long, spread 16 inches on center.
D. Damage Repair: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barriers using duct tape or other
type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 07210
•a
07210-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
IMP
SECTION 07212
RIGID INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, (if any), along with the
General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 SCOPE: The work included under this Section is Rigid Wall Insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 BASIC MATERIALS:
A. Wall Insulation: Shall be a closed-cell foam plastic Oolyisocya n u rate insulation, foil-
faced on both sides, in sizes and thickness required, equal to Celotex Thermax.
B. Physical properties of the insulation shall be as follows:
1. Density: 2 pcf.
2. Compressive Strength: 25 P.S.I. minimum.
3. Water Vapor Transmission: Less than .03 perm's.
4. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
5. Smoke Developed: 120 or less.
6. Thickness: 1-1/2".
7. R-Value: "Aged" R-Value of 4.5 per inch minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Walls: Install the 16"x 4'-0"x 1-1/2"thick boards horizjontally between furring. Fasten
the board to the masonry wall with approved mastic.
END OF SECTION 07212
07212-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 07465
PREFINISHED VINYL SIDING, FASCIA AND SOFFITS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Solid vinyl siding.
B. Solid vinyl soffit.
C. Vinyl faced aluminum fascia.
D. Vinyl trim.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing.
B. Section 07260 -Vapor Retarders.
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
D. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D 256-Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance
of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
B. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under
Flexural Load.
E. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between 30 Degrees C. and 30 Degrees C.
F. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compound.
07465-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
G. ASTM D 2843 - Standard Tet Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics.
H. ASTM D 3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding.
I. ASTM D 4477 - Standard Specification for Rigid Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride(
(PVC) Soffit.
J. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
K. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Building Construction and
Materials.
L. ISMA-Fire Performance Evaluation Conducted in Accordance With The Intermediate-
Scale Multistory Test.
1.4 SUBMITTAL:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed product data and installation ,
instructions for specified vinyl products.
C. Selection Samples: Submit color chips of manufacturer's full range of colors for
Architect's selection.
D. Verification Samples: Submit three samples, each 12 inches in length, of each
specified vinyl product in specified color.
E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit evidence of Code compliance specified in
QUALITY ASSURANCE Article of this section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Regulatory Requirements: Code compliance in accordance with the following:
1. BOCA.
2. ICBO.
3. SBCCL.
4. Metropolitan Dade County, Florida.
5. BBA.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: �^
A. Deliver vinyl products to project site in original packaging.
07465-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Tore vinyl siding products in original packaging, on flat surface under cover, stacked
no more than 12 boxes high. Do not store in location(where temperatures may exceed
130 degrees F.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. Alcoa Building Products, Inc. backs its vinyl siding and soffit with an Alcoa or Mastic
Registered Medallion Lifetime Limited Warranty. Consult actual product warranty
certificates for complete coverage details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Alcoa Building Products, Inc.; 1501 Michigan Street,
P.O.Box 57; Sidney OH 45365; ASD. Tel (800) 962-6973; E-mail:
TRADE.ABP c@alcoa.com; Web Site: www.alcoahomes.com.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mastic; 1501 Michigan Street, P.O.Box 57; Sidney OH
45365-0057; Telephone (800) MASTIC6 (627-8426).
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600.
D. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Polyvinyl Chloride: Supply polyvinyl chloride products having material properties
meeting the following:
1. Siding classification in accordance with ASTM D 3679; Class 2.
2. Cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 1784: 13334.
3. Coefficient of linear expansion in accordance with ASTM D 696: 0.000029 inch
per inch per degree F.
4. Tensile strength when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638; Minimum 7,100
pounds per square inch.
5. Modulus of elasticity when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638; Minimum
360,000 pounds per square inch, average.
6. Izod impact, standard 1/8 inch bar when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256;
3.30 foot-pounds per inch, average.
7. Shore D Hardness: Minimum 73.
8. Specific Gravity: Minimum 1.39.
9. Deflection temperature when tested in accordance with ATM D 648: 170 degrees
F., 264 pounds per square inch.
07465-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
10. Smoke density rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2843:48 percent,
average.
11. Horizontal flammability, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635:
a. Bum distance: 20 mm.
b. Burn time: Less than 5 seconds.
12. Surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84: ..
Flame spread 20, fuel contribution 0, smoke density 400.
13. 1-hour firewall: When tested in accordance to ASTM E 119, material is an
approved exterior cladding when applied over gypsum sheathing.
14. ISMA:When tested in accordance to Intermediate-Scale Multistory Test,material
is an approved exterior cladding.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum nails, alloy 5056 or 6110, having minimum tensile strength
63,000 pounds per square inch, or equivalent.
C. Vapor Retarder. Specified in Section 07260.
D. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07900.
2.3 VINYL SOFFIT AND TRIM:
A. Soffit:
1. Product Description: 2" wide bead board profile, % inch depth; nominal 0.040
inch material thickness; nominal 12 feet piece length.
2. Nailing Hem: Single-row,with elongated nailing holes 1-1/4 inches long at 1-5/8
inches on center.
3. Finish: Low-gloss woodgrain texture.
4. Color: As selected from standard range.
5. Supply ventilating type soffit material.
B. Vinyl Fascia:
1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Size: See profile indicated in details.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from standard range.
C. Material: Vinyl covered. .024 aluminum with wood grain.
C. Vinyl Trim:
1. Soffit J-Trim: Channel, 1-1/2 inches nailing leg, 3/4 inch forward leg, '/Z inch -w
channel width; color to match soffit.
2. T-Channel: 1-3/4 inches batten, 5/8 inch recess; color to match soffit.
3. Frieze Runner F-Channel: color to match soffit..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
07465-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation of vinyl products; verify
dimensions and acceptability of substrate.
B. Do not proceed with installation of vinyl products until unacceptable conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation of vapor retarder is specified in Section 07260.
B. Install vinyl products in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
C. Attach vinyl products to substrate for weathertight installation; ensure that horizontal
components are installed true to level, that vertical components are installed true to
plumb.
D. Installation of joint sealers is specified in Section 07900.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water.
B. After completing installation of vinyl products, remove from project site excess
materials and debris resulting from installation of vinyl products.
END OF SECTION 07465
07465-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 07535
MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING
OVER METAL DECKING
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Roof insulation application to prepared substrate.
B. Roof membrane application.
C. Roof flashing application.
D. Incorporation of sheet metal flashing components and roofing accessories into the roof
system.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Sheet metal flashing and trim.
B. Sheet metal roofing specialties.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 05120, Structural Steel
1.4 REFERENCES:
A. References in these Specifications to standards,test methods,codes etc.,are implied
to mean the latest edition of such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated
list of Associations, Institutions, and Societies which may be used as references
throughout these Specifications.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrations International, Inc.
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research
FS Federal Specifications General Services Administration - Specifications
Standards
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administrations
RIEI Roofing Industry Educational Institute
SBCCI Standard Building Code Congress International
07535-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The basic work descriptions(components,layering and attachment methods)required
in this Specification are referenced below. See also Parts 2 &3 for specific products, '
preparation, application and details.
1. DECK: Metal Deck
2. INSULATION: Tapered rigid polyisocyanurate boards, mechanicaffy
attached using the specified fasteners according to the
specified fastening frequency with 3/4" Perlite overlay.
3. ROOFING SYSTEM: Modified Bituminous Membrane
4. FLASHING SYSTEM: Mineral-Surfaced
5. GUARANTEE: Roof Membrane Guarantee, 20 year NDL
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. All Submittals which do not conform to the following requirements will be rejected.
1. Submittals Prior to Contract Award:
a. Letter from the proposed primary roofing manufacturer confirming that the
bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed
system.
b. Letter from the primary roofing manufacturer stating that the proposed
application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to
qualify the project for the specified guarantee.
1.7. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Acceptable Products: Provide primary roofing products,including each type of sheet,
all manufactured in the United Stated, supplied by a single manufacturer which has
been successfully producing the specified types of primary products for not less than
ten (10)years. Provide secondary or accessory products which are acceptable to the •
manufacturer of the primary roofing products.
B. Acceptable Contractor: Have a minimum of two (2)years experience in successfully
installing the same or similar roofing materials and be certified in writing by the roofing
materials manufacturer to install the primary roofing products.
C. Project Acceptance: Submit a completed manufacturer's application for roof
guarantee form along with Shop Drawings of the roofs showing all dimensions,
penetrations, and details. The form shall contain all the technical information
applicable to the project including deck types,roof slopes,base sheet and/or insulation
07535-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
assemblies (with method of attachment and fastener type), and manufacturer's
membrane assembly proposed for installation. The form shall also contain accurate
and complete information requested, including proper names, addresses, zip codes
and telephone numbers. The project must receive approval,through this process,prior
to shipment of materials to the project site.
D. Scope of Work: The work to be performed under this Specification shall include, but
is not limited to, the following: Attend necessary job meetings and furnish competent
and full time supervision, experienced roof mechanics, all materials, tools, and
equipment necessary to complete, in an acceptable manner, the roof installation in
accordance with this Specification. Comply with the latest written application
instructions of the manufacturer of the primary roofing products. In addition,
' application practice shall comply with requirements and recommendations contained
in the Latest Edition of the Handbook of Accepted.Roofing Knowledge (HARK) as
published by the National Roofing Contractor's Association, amended to include the
acceptance of a phased roof system installation.
E. Local Regulations: Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific
requirements of the city and/or state of jurisdiction.
F. Manufacturer Requirements: Ensure that the primary roofing materials manufacturer
provides direct trained company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform
periodic inspections as necessary, and conducts a final inspection upon successful
completion of the project.
G. Recommended Maintenance: In addition to the guarantee,furnish to the Owner the
manufacturer's printed recommendations for proper maintenance of the specified roof
system, including inspection frequencies, penetration addition policies, temporary
repairs, and leak call procedures.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled
containers and in quantities required to allow continuity of application.
B. Storage: Store materials out of direct exposure to the elements. Store roof goods on
a clean, flat and dry surface. All material stored on the roof overnight shall be stored
"' on pallets. Rolls of roofing must be stored on ends. Store materials on the roof in a
manner so as to preclude overloading of deck and building structure. Store materials
such as solvents, adhesives and asphalt cutback products away from open flames,
sparks or excessive heat. Cover all material using a breathable cover such as a
canvas. Polyethylene or other non-breathable plastic coverings are not acceptable.
07535-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Handling: Handle all materials in such a manner as to preclude damage and
contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Handle rolled good to prevent damage
to edges or ends.
D. Damaged Material: Any materials that are found to be damaged or stored in any
manner other than stated above will be automatically rejected, removed and replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Requirements Prior to Job Start:
1. Notification: Give a minimum of five (5) days notice to the Owner and Wit
manufacturer prior to commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily
basis of any change in work schedule.
2. Permits: Obtain all permits required by local agencies and pay all fees which an
may be required for the performance of the work.
3. Safety: Familiarize every member of the application crew with all fire and safety
regulations recommended by OSHA, NRCA and other industry or local ."
governmental groups.
B. Environmental Requirements:
1. Precipitation: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the event
there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate
precautions to ensure that materials, applied roofing, and building interiors are
protected from possible moisture damage or contamination.
2. Temperature Restrictions: .,
a. Maintain the proper temperature for hot asphalt adhesive. Application
should be suspended in situations where the adhesive cannot be kept at
temperatures allowing for even distribution. dit
C. Protection Requirements:
1. Membrane Protection: Provide protection against staining and mechanical
damage for newly applied roofing and adjacent surfaces throughout this project.
2. Torch Safety: Designate one person on each crew to perform a daily fire watch.
The designated crew member shall watch for fires or smoldering materials on all
areas of roof construction. Continue the fire watch for one hour after roofing
material application has been suspended for the day.
3. Limited Access: Prevent access by the public to materials,tools and equipment
during the course of the project.
4. Debris Removal: Remove all debris from the project site and take to a legal
dumping area authorized to receive such materials.
07535-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
5. Site Condition: Complete, to the Owner's satisfaction, all job site clean-up
including building interior, exterior and landscaping where affected by the
construction.
1.10 GUARANTEEIWARRANTY:
A. Roof Membrane Guarantee: Upon'successful completion of the project, and after all
post installation procedures have been completed, furnish the Owner with the
Manufacturer's twenty (20) year labor and materials membrane guarantee. The
guarantee shall be a term type,without deductibles or limitations on coverage amount.
1. Twenty-Year Roof Membrane Guarantee (20 year NDL).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ROOFING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY/PRODUCTS:
A. Rigid Roof Insulation: Provide roof insulation that is UL and/or FM approved. All
panels must possess adequate rigidity to span the flute openings of metal roof decks.
Provide insulation that is approved in writing by the insulation manufacturer for
intended use and for use with the specified roof assembly. Install insulation as a
separation layer over the roof deck,the existing substrate and/or to obtain the desired
thermal R-value where specified or required. Maintain a maximum panel size of four
(4)feet by four(4)feet where insulation is specified to be installed in hot asphalt. Total
Average R Value shall be R=30.
2.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS:
A. Roofing Membrane Assembly: A roof membrane assembly consisting of two (2)
plies of prefabricated,fiberglass-reinforced,homogeneous Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene
(SBS)block copolymer modified asphalt membrane, secured to a prepared substrate.
Both reinforcement mats are impregnated and coated each side with a high-quality
SBS modified bitumen blend. The assembly shall possess waterproofing capability,
such that a phased roof application, with only the modified bitumen base ply in place,
can be achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment to the watertight
integrity of the entire roof system. The modified bitumen finish ply shall be fully
adhered to the modified bitumen base ply. Provide sheet components to meet the
following physical and mechanical requirements.
1. Modified Bitumen Base Ply and Stripping Ply:
a. Thickness (avg.): 118 mils (2.3 mm).
b. Weight (avg. per 100 ft.2 of coverage) 90 lbs.
C. Low temperatrue flexibility PASS (ASTM D5147).
@13° F (-25° C)
d. Breaking Load (avg.) 30 Ib-f/inch (ASTM D5147).
07535-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
@ 73° F
e. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) 50% (ASTM D5147).
@73° F
f. Compound Stability (min.) 212° F (100° C).
g. Approvals UL Class listed, FM Approved
(products shall bear seals of
approval).
h. Reinforcement Fiberglass mat and scrim.
2. Modified Bitumen Finish Ply:
a. Thickness (avg.) 130 mils (3.0 mm).
b. Thickness at selvage (avg.) 98 mils (2.5 mm).
c. Weight (avg. per 100 ft.2 of coverage )90 lbs. (4.4 kg/m2).
d. Low temperature flexibility PASS (ASTM D5147).
@ -13° F (-25° C)
e. Breaking Load (avg.) 30 Ib-f/inch (ASTM D5147).
@73° F
f. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) 55% (ASTM D5147).
@73° F
g. Compound Stability (min.) 212° F (100° C).
h. Approvals UL Class listed, FM Approved
(products shall bear seals of
approval).
I. Reinforcement Fiberglass mat.
j. Surfacing Ceramic granules.
B. Flashing Membrane Assembly : A flashing membrane assembly consisting of a
prefabricated,fiberglass scrim-mat reinforced,Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene(SBS)block
copolymer modified asphalt membrane with aluminum cladding.The modified bitumen
sheet shall be fully adhered to a prepared substrate as specified herein. Provide sheet
components to meet the following physical and mechanical requirements.
1. Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet:
a. Thickness (avg.) 138 mils (3.5 mm)
b. Weight (avg. per 100 ft.2 of coverage) 90 lbs (4.4 kg/M2)
C. Low temperature flexibility PASS (ASTM D5147)
@0° F (-18° F)
d. Breaking Load (avg.) 85 lb-f/inch (ASTM D5147)
@73° F
e. Ultimate Elongation (avg.) 45% (ASTM D5147)
@ 73- F
f. Compound Stability (min.) 230° F (110° C)
g. Thermal Shock Resistance (maximum)0.2% (UEAtc standard)
h. Approvals UL Approved, FM Approved
(products shall bear seals of
approval)
07535-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
I. Reinforcement Fiberglass scrim mat or polyester
J. Surfacing Mineral
2. Reinforcing Ply (Same as roof system base ply).
3. Systems approved:
A. Siplast
B. M.B. Technology
C. Soprema
D. Johns-Manville
2.3 ROOFING ACCESSORIES:
A. Bituminous Materials:
1. Primer(Asphalt Primer): A high flash,quick drying,asphalt solvent blend which
meets or exceeds ASTM D41-85 requirements;
2. Mastics (Plastic Cement): An asphalt cutback mastic, reinforced with non-
asbestos fibers, used as a base for setting metal flanges conforming to ASTM
D4586-86 Type II and FS SS-C-153, Type I requirements.
B. Pitch Pan Filler(grout filler in conjunction with poured compounds):
1. A single component, cold-applied urethane compound of pouring consistency,
exhibiting no weathering or cracking when tested according to ASTM D920 Type
S. (See pitch pan preparation for proper mixing:and use). Acceptable products:
a. Sonolastic SL 1 by Sonnenbom Building Products, Minneapolis, MN (612)
835-3434.
2. A two (2) component, cold-applied urethane compound of pouring consistency,
exhibiting no weathering or cracking when tested according to ASTM D529-62
(cycle A). (See pitch pan preparation for proper mixing and use). Acceptable
products:
a. Finestone Rubberguard Pourable Sealer S-10
' 3. A trowelable, one-part, neoprene-based elastomeric sealant. (See pitch pan
preparation for proper mixing and use). Acceptable products;
a. Black Jack No. 1010 by Gibson-Homans; Twinsburg, OH (216)425-3255.
D. Caulking and Sealants: A single-component, high-performance, elastomeric sealant.
Acceptable types are as follows:
1. ASTM D232, FS TTS-0023C
Flexible Seal; by AC Products, Inc., Placentia, CA (714) 630-7311.
2. ASTM C920, FS TTS-0023C Type II C
07535-7 Rev. 6/01
WIR
C-668
Sonolastic NP 1 by Sonnenbom Building Products; Minneapolis, MN (612)835-
3434.
3. Black Jack No. 1010 by Gibson-Homans; Twinsburg, OH (216) 425-3255. .�
E. Ceramic Granules: No. 11 Grade Specification Ceramic granules of color scheme
matching the granule surfacing of the finish ply. ,
F. Fasteners (to be applied in accordance with FMI-90 requirements):
1. Insulation Fasteners: Provide insulation fasteners and plates that are FM
Approved, and/or approved by the manufacturer of the primary roofing products.
The insulation fasteners shall provide attachment required to meet the specified
uplift performance and to restrain the insulation panels against the potential for
ridging, etc. The fastening pattern for each insulation panel to be used shall be
as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and approved by the
manufacturer of the primary roofing products.
2. Provide insulation mechanical fasteners and metal plates for wood decks that
have been factory-coated for corrosion resistance, and when subjected to 30
Kestemich cycles, must show less than 10% red rust, conforming to Factory
Mutual 4470. Acceptable insulation fasteners types for wood decks are listed
below.
3. A single unit, precision-formed,fluorocarbon-coated screw-type roofing fastener
having a minimum two hundred-one thousandths (0.201) inch diameter shank
and a minimum two hundred-fifty thousands (0.250) inch diameter thread. All
plates used with the fastener shall be a metal-type having a minimum three (3)
inch diameter, as supplied by the fastener manufacturer.
4. Acceptable insulation fastener manufacturers for specific deck types are listed
below:
a. Roofgrip with Buildex Metal Plates by ITW Buildex; Itasca, IL (312) 595-
3500.
b. Dekfast #14 with Dekfast Steel Hexagonal Plates, by Construction
Fasteners, Inc., Wyomissing, PA (215) 376-5751.
C. No. 14 Standard Roofing Fastener with Olympic standard G90 three-inch
plates by Olympic Fasteners; Agawam, MA (800) 633-3800.
PART 3 -EXECUTION:
3.1 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION:
A. Insulation: Install insulation panels with end joints offset; edges of the panels shall be
in moderate contact without forcing, applied in strict accordance with the insulation
manufacturer's requirements and the following instructions. Where insulation is
installed in two or more layers, stagger joints between layers.
07535-8 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Multiple Layer Insulation: Mechanically attach first layer to the substrate, using
the specified fasteners, at a rate of one (1) fastener per two (2) square feet of
panel area (4 per 2' x4' panel). Stagger the panel joints between the layers.
2. Second layer to be applied in hot asphalt in accordance with FM-1-90.
3.2 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION:
A. Membrane Application: Apply roofing in accordance with roofing system
manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Application of roofing shall
immediately follow application of insulation as a continuous operation.
B. Aesthetic Considerations: An aesthetically pleasing overall appearance of the
finished roof application is a standard requirement for this project. The Contractor shall
make necessary preparations, utilize recommended application techniques, apply the
specified materials(i.e.,granules,metallic powder,etc.),and exercise care in ensuring
that the finished application is acceptable to the Owner.
C. Priming: Prime metal flanges (all jacks, edge metal, lead drain flashings, etc.) and
concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of ASTM D41-85 asphalt primer.
D. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer,and sealants will not
be permitted.
E. Roofing Application: Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, creases or
fishmouths. Exert sufficient pressure on the roll during application to ensure
prevention of air pockets. Stagger the lap seams between the base ply layer and the
finish ply layer. Stagger the courses to ensure this.
1. Apply all layers of roofing perpendicular to the slope of the deck.
2. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing minimum three (3)
inch side and four (4) inch end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the hot
asphalt. Stagger end laps a minimum of three (3) feet.
3. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing,minimum three(3)inch side and
four(4)inch end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the hot asphalt. Stagger
end laps of the finish ply a minimum of three (3) feet. Stagger side laps of the
finish ply a minimum twelve(12)inches from side laps in the underlying base ply.
Stagger end laps of the finish ply a minimum of three(3)feet from end laps in the
underlying base ply.
4. Maximum sheet lengths and special fastening of the specified roof membrane
system may be required at various slope increments where the roof deck slope
exceeds one-half(%) inch per foot. The manufacturer shall provide acceptable
sheet lengths and the required fastening schedule for all roofing sheet
applications to applicable roof slopes.
07535-9 Rev. 6/01
C-668
F. Granule Embedment: Broadcast mineral granules over all bitumen overruns on the
finish ply surface, while the bitumen is still hot, to ensure a monolithic surface color.
G. Flashing Application (Masonry): Flash masonry parapet walls and curbs using the
reinforcing sheet and the flashing membrane. The reinforcing sheet shall have
minimum three (3) inch side laps and extend a minimum of three (3) inches onto the
base ply surface and three(3)inches up the parapet wall above the cant. Fully adhere
the flashing reinforcing sheet. The laps of the flashing layer and the lap seams in the
reinforcing layer should not coincide. After the final roofing ply has been applied to the
top of the cant, prepare the surface area that is to receive flashing coverage by torch "
heating granular surfaces or by application of asphalt primer, allowing primer to dry
thoroughly.Apply the flashing into place using three-foot widths(cut off the end of roll)
always lapping the factory selvage edge. Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of four
(4) inches beyond the toe of the cant onto the prepared surface of the finished roof
and up the wall to the desired flashing height. Exert pressure on the flashing sheet
during application to ensure complete contact with the wall/roof surfaces, preventing **
air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a d amp sponge or shop rag. Check
and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge of the flashing on nine (9) inch
centers. (See manufacturer's schematic for visual interpretation).
H. Flashing Application (Wood Surfaces): Flash wood or plywood parapet walls and
curbs using the reinforcing sheet and the flashing membrane. The reinforcing sheet
shall have minimum three(3)inch side laps and extend a minimum of three (3)inches
onto the base ply surface and to the top of the parapet wall, curb, etc. Nail the
reinforcing sheet through the field of the sheet to the vertical wood surface on twelve
(12) inch centers from the top of the cant to top of wall, curb, etc. Fully adhere the
remainder of the flashing reinforcing sheet that extends over the cant and roof level.
After the final roofing ply has been applied to the top of the cant, prepare the surface
area that is to receive flashing coverage.Apply the flashing into place using three foot
widths (cut off the end of roll) always lapping the factory selvage edge. Extend the
flashing sheet a minimum of four (4) inches beyond the toe of the cant onto the
prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height.
Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with
the wall/roof surfaces, preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a
damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge
of the flashing on nine (9) inch centers. (See manufacturer's schematic for visual
interpretation).
1. Water Cut-Off: At end of day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a
water cut-off at all open edges. Cut-offs can be built using asphalt or plastic cement
and roofing felts,constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must
be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing.
3.3 ROOF SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH RELATED COMPONENTS:
07535-10 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. The following is a list of verbal descriptions for correct installation of components
integrated into the roofing membrane assembly. In all cases, unless otherwise
approved, incorporate flanged components into the system between the application of
the base ply and the finish ply. The flange must be primed with a uniform coating of
approved ASTM D41-85 asphalt primer and allowed to dry thoroughly;all flanges must
be set in approved mastic.
1. Edge Metal: Completely prime metal flanges and allow to dry priorto installation.
Tum the base ply down two (2) inches past the roof edge and over the nailer.
After the base ply and continuous cleat(if applicable)have been installed,set the
flange in mastic and stagger nail every three (3) inches on center. Strip-in the
flange using the base ply material, extending, a minimum of four (4) inches
beyond the edge of the flange. The finish ply shall then be applied, terminating
at the gravel-stop rise of the edge metal(see manufacturer's schematic for visual
interpretation).
2. Lead Pipe Flashings: Completely prime the lead flanges and allow to dry prior
to installation. After the base ply has been applied, set the flange in mastic and
strip-in the flange using the base ply material, extending a minimum of four(4)
inches beyond the edge of the flange. The finish ply shall then be applied,
terminating at the flange-sleeve juncture of the pipe flashing(see manufacturer's
schematic for visual interpretation).
3. Lead Drain Flashings: Completely prime the lead drain flashing and allow to dry
prior to installation. After the base ply has been applied, set the lead flashing
sheet in mastic and form to tum down inside the drain bowl. Ply-in the perimeter
of the lead flashing using an additional layer of the base ply material,overlapping
the perimeter of the lead a minimum of four(4) inches. The finish ply shall then
be applied, extending beyond the clamping ring seal. Install the clamping ring
with all clamps, bolts, etc., in place (see manufacturer's schematic for visual
interpretation).
4. Pitch Pans: Pitch pan use shall be avoided, however, where no other flashing
application is feasible, pitch pans will be allowed.
a. Completely clean the metal penetration of,all roofing materials.
b. Clean any residual oil shop coatings from'the inside wall of the pitch pan
using Naphtha solvent. The pitch pan wall shall then be etched using a 5%
acetic acid solution.
C. Completely prime the flange of the pitch pan and allow to dry prior to
installation.
d. After the base ply has been applied, set the flange in mastic and secure to
the deck.
e. Strip-in the flange using the base ply material,extending a minimum of four
(4) inches beyond the edge of the flange.
f. Fill the pitch pan with a non-shrink grout to a level approximately 1'/ - 2
inches below the top rim.
g. Install duct tape around the pitch pan wall to act as a form for the pitch pan
filler.
07535-11 Rev. 6/01
M
C-668
h. Proper mixing if required of the pitch pan filler should follow manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
I. Slowly and carefully fill the pitch pan to the top level of the duct tape, ,
ensuring the finished level is above the top rim.
j. Apply the finish ply, terminating at the flange-pitch pan wall juncture.
k. Install a watertight umbrella to the penetration, completely covering the
opening of the pitch pan (see manufacturer's schematic for visual
interpretation).
5. Metal Pipe Flashings: Completely prime the metal pipe flanges and allow to dry
prior to installation. After the base ply has been applied,set the flanges in mastic
and strip-in the flange using the base ply material, extending a minimum of four
(4) inches beyond the edge of the flange. The finish ply shall then be applied,
terminating at the flange-sleeve juncture of the pipe flashing. Install a watertight
umbrella to the penetration, completely covering the opening of the pipe flashing
(see manufacture's schematic for visual interpretation).
6. Sealant: Caulk all exposed finish ply edges at gravel stops,waste stacks, pitch
pans, vent stacks, etc., with a smooth, continuous bead of approved sealant.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS:
A. Site Condition: Leave all areas around the job site free of debris, roofing materials,
equipment and related items after completion of job. •
B. Notification of Completion: Notify the manufacturer by means of manufacturer's
printed Notification of Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final
inspection date.
C. Final Inspection:
1. Post-Installation Meeting: Hold a meeting at the completion of the project,
attended by all parties that were present at the pre-job conference. A punch list 01
of items required for completion shall be compiled by the Contractor and the
manufacturer's representative. Complete, sign, and mail the punch list form to
the manufacturer's headquarters.
D. Issuance of the Guarantee: Complete all post installation procedures and meet the
manufacturer's final endorsement for issuance of the specified guarantee.
END OF SECTION 07535
07535-12 Rev. 6/01
PW
C-668
SECTION 07610
STANDING SEAM ROOF
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included: All labor and material for complete roofing insulation.
1. Preformed Metal Roof.
2. Ice and Water Shield Membrane EDPM.
3. Anchorage Clips and Fasteners.
4. Related Flashing and Trim.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Plywood Substrate - Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
B. Sealants - Section 07920, Sealants and Caulking.
C. Plumbing Roof Vents- Section 15400, Plumbing.
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM A446 - Steel sheet panels.
B. SMACNA -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA:
A. Submit Shop Drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300,
Submittals.
B. Indicate material profile,jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods and
installation details.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 01300,
Submittals, of the Specifications.
1.5 SAMPLES:
A. Submit manufacturer's standard profile samples in accordance with Section 01300,
Submittals.
07610-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Panels should be stored on edge in a clean, dry place. One end should be slightly
elevated to allow moisture to run off rather than accumulate on the faces.
B. Panels with strippable plastic film must not be stored in the open exposed to the
sun.
C. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion
and to provide ventilation.
D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or
staining.
E. In handling prefinished panels, lift up panels and do not slope panels when
stacking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. American Building Components Company, Inc., Denver, Colorado.
B. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
C. M.M. Systems.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS:
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gauge core steel, on a continuous coil,
galvanized steel finish.
B. Apply strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication, shipping and storage.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS: "
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required.
B. Sealant: As specified in Section 07920, Sealants and Caulking.
2.4 FABRICATION:
A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof
panels.
07610-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. All flashings, hem exposed edges on underside '/ inch.
2.5 BERRIDGE TEE-PANEL STANDING SEAM SYSTEM:
A. Panels and snap-on closed seams shall be roll-form6' d in continuous lengths.
B. Extruded vinyl weather seal to be supplied as an integral part of the snap-on seam
to prevent siphoning or flooding over seam.
C. Seam spacing shall be nominal 12%" on center.
D. Seam shall be the classic low profile, nominal height I".
E. Panels and snap-on seam to be continuous at change of slope where practical.
F. Attachment to solid sheathing by concealed tee clip system. Two tee clips at eaves
and on both sides of miter on change of slope, and 20" spacing along the seam.
Tee clip attached to solid sheathing with 1%4' long ring shank galvanized roofing nail
or screws. System shall be in conformance with UL 90 uplift resistance rating.
2.6 EDPM MEMBRANE:
A. Membrane underlayment shall be peel and stick membrane installed over plywood
decking according to manufacturer's suggested procedure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect substrate to verify the substrate is clean and smooth, free of depressions,
waves, or projections, properly sloped to valleys and,eaves.
B. Install EDPM membrane underlayment in single layer, weather-lapped head six (6)
inches at all edges. Smooth and free of damage or defects over the plywood
sheathing.
C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly
set, cant strips and reglets in place and nailing strips located.
D. Verify substrate is dry and free of dust or dirt. Joints in wood deck to be solidly
supported and nailed.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
07610-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Storage and Handling: Protection shall be provided during fabrication, shipment,
storage and erection. During shipment, finished surfaces shall be protected from
abrasion by a removable plastic film between areas of contact. Jobsite storage
shall be in a clean, dry area out of direct contact with the ground, under cover or
sloped for drainage, protected from abuse by traffic and from contamination by
corrosive or staining materials. Stored materials and unfinished work shall be
secured against wind damage. Installed panels shall be protected from abuse by
other trades. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide walk boards
in areas of heavy traffic and any other measures required to prevent damage by his
own crews, and notify the General Contractor of any necessity for protection from
other trades.
B. Before installation, this Contractor shall verify that the structure is ready to receive
his work. He shall check field dimensions and alignment of structural members to
assure that the roof panels and f lashing will be straight and true. The Architect
shall be notified on unresolved conditions which may adversely affect the
performance or appearance of the installed roof, and work on that location will not
proceed until approval by the Architect.
C. All work shall be installed in accord with the approved shop details under direct
supervision of an experienced sheet metal craftsman. Attachments and joints shall
allow for expansion and contraction from temperature changes without distortion or .�
elongation of fastener holes. Flashing shall be installed in strict accord with the
recommended practice in the AA, NRCA and SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal
Manuals, without fasteners in end laps and isolated from dissimilar materials.
D. Completed work shall be plumb and true, free of scrapes and dents. Panel ribs
shall be on the module indicated in the Contract Drawings and within the tolerance
allowed by the actual construction dimension. Excess sealant shall be removed
and touch-up paint applied to any areas where paint scrapes occur. Any panels
which are badly damaged and in the judgement of the Architect cannot be replaced
shall be removed and replaced.
E. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation.
F. To permit correct alignment of panels, all horizontal lines must be held level and all
vertical lines plumb.
G. Install starter and edge s trips before starting installation of roofing sheets.
H. Roofing sheets shall be installed in continuous lengths. No horizontal joints
allowed.
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION: -•
07610-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Final inspection will be performed by a representative of the panel manufacturer
and report written to Installer and Architect as to acceptability to panel
manufacturer.
3.4 WARRANTY:
A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty.
END OF SECTION 07610
07610-5 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 07660
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Fiber-Cement Siding
B. Fiber Cement Paneling
C. Fiber Cement Trim
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Prefinished Fascia and Gutters - Section 07411
B. Sealants- Section 07920
C. Painting - Section 09900
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. National Evaluation Service, Inc., 1997 report.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA:
A. Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and
installation details.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Submittal Section
of the Specifications.
1.5 SAMPLES:
A. Submit manufacturer's standard profile samples in accordance with Section 01300.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Panels should be stored on edge on smooth flat surface in a clean, dry place. One
end should be slightly elevated to allow moisture to run off rather than accumulate on
the faces. Allow product to dry prior to installation.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting,bending or abrasion,and
to provide ventilation.
07660-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or
staining.
D. In handling prefinished panels, lift up panels and do not slide panels when unstacking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. James Hardie
26300 LaAlameda, Suite 250
Mission Viejo, California 92691
2.2 SIDING:
A. Hardi-Panel 4'x8' "Cedar Mill"textured siding, Factory Primed for paint finish.
B. Hardi-Plank "Cedar Mill" textured lap siding, 6" panels with 5" exposure, factory
primed. ,.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel nails @ 16" o.c.
B. Sealant: As specified in Section 07920.
C. Hardi-Trim: Sizes as indicated on the Plans.
2.4 FABRICATION:
A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be galvanized steel.
B. All flashings, hem exposed edges on underside % inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect substrate to verify the substrate is clean and smooth, free of depressions,
waves or projections.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Execute all work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07660-2 Rev. 6/01
z`
C-668
B. To permit correct alignment of panels, all horizontal lines must be held level and all
vertical lines plumb.
C. Install lap panels with proper joint and joint compound. Fasten with 1-1/4"galvanized
ring shank nails. Predrill at ends of panels.
END OF SECTION 07660
,b.
07660-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 07921
SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Application of sealants at control and expansionjoints on exterior vertical and
horizontal intersections to provide a water and air tight barrier, as stated below and as
noted on drawings.
B. Associated materials and preparatory work to insure a successful sealant application.
M" 1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B. ASTM D 2240 -Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
C. ASTM C 1248 and C 510 - Staining.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Literature: Submit six (6) copies of product'data sheets and manufacturer's
installation instructions. Note specifically which (if any) sealants are to be in physical
contact(such as parapet and reglet intersections),confirming compatibility of submitted
products.
„ B. Samples: A 2” cured sample of each chosen color and type of sealant.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Compatibility with Substrate and Coatings:Applicator shall be responsible for verifying
with sealant manufacturer that sealants used are compatible with joint substrates and
coatings to which sealants will come in contact.
B. Joint Design Criteria: Applicator shall be responsible for verifying with sealant
manufacturer that installed joint dimensions are adequate for movement capabilities
for extreme and significant moving joint sealants.
C. Applicator shall be responsible for providing a completely sealed building and ensure
that all exterior joints between surfaces are properly sealed even if not detailed in
Contract Documents.
07921-1 Rev. 6/01
..s
C-668
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this
section with minimum ten (10) years experience.
B. Applicator and job foreman shall have minimum five(5)years experience on equivalent
projects. '
C. Use personnel specifically trained in proper application procedures who are thoroughly
familiar with joint details shown on drawings and installation requirements as specified
in this section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers identifying each product
specified, relating to product literature submitted.
B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation;take precautions to ensure
material fitness when installed for design performance. ..
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. Warrant sealed joints against adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant and
watertightness of sealed joint for a period of five (5) years for labor and material.
B. Provide material warranty of five (5)years for polyurethanes and twenty(20)years for
silicones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS (See schedule for use of each sealant type)
A: Type 1: ASTM C 920; low modulus, one component, nonsag, neutral cure silicone.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent;elongation, 1600%.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 160 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 15-20; ASTM D 2240.
4. Staining: None; ASTM C 1248.
5. Manufacturers: Dow Corning Corp. 790.
B. Type 2: ASTM C 920; intermediate modulus, one component, nonsag, neutral cure
silicone. •
1. Elongation Capability: Plus or minus 50 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 300 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 30; ASTM D 2240.
4. Staining: None, ASTM C 510.
07921-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
lop 5. Manufacturers: Dow Corning Corp. 795; 995.
C. Type 3: ASTM C 920; high modulus, one componerl't, nonsag, acetoxy cure silicone.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus or minus 25 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 35 to 140 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 23; ASTM D 2240.
4. Manufacturers: Dow Coming Corp. 999A; Pe¢ora 863; GE 1200.
D. Type 4:ASTM C 920;medium modulus,one component,nonsag, neutral cure silicone.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus or minus 50 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 120 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 25-30; ASTM D 2240.
4. Staining: None; ASTM 510.
5. Manufacturers: Dow Coming Corp. 791; GE Silpruf.
E. Type 5: ASTM C 920, low modulus, two component, nonsag, polyurethane.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus or minus 25 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 120degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20-25; ASTM D 2240.
4. Manufacturers: Mameco International, Vulkem 922; Sika Corporation, Sikaflex
2C/SL; Tremco, Dymeric 511; Pecora, Dynatrol ll, Vulkem 45 (self leveling).
F. Type 6: ASTM 920; medium modulus, one component, nonsag, polyurethane.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus or minus 25 percent.
„ 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 120 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 25-40; ASTM D 2240.
4. Manufacturers:Mameco International,Vulkem 116;Sika Corporation,Sikaflex 1 a.
G. Type 7:ASTM C 920;one component,self-leveling,fuel resistant, low modulus silicone
sealant.
1. Elongation Capability: Plus 100, minus 50 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
3. Shore A Hardness Range: 15-20; ASTM D 2240.
4. Manufacturers: Dow Corning 890 SL, 888.
H. Type 8: ASTM 834; single component, modified acrylic latex sealant, interior sealant.
1. Elongation Capability: 7.5 percent.
2. Service Temperature Range: 32-95 degrees F.
3. Manufacturers: Pecora AC 20, Tremco 834.
I. Type 9: ASTM epoxy floor joint sealant.
1. Elongation Capability: 20% maximum.
2. Shore A Hardness Range: 80.
2.2 PRIMERS:
07921-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Comply with manufacturers's instructions. Manufacturer shall be consulted for all
surfaces not specifically covered in submitted application instructions.
2.3 BAKER ROD -TAPE:
A. Closed-cell polyethylene, open-cell polyurethane, or open-cell polyethylene soft-type
baker rod as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Bond breaker tape shall be used
to prevent three-sided adhesion in location where backer rod cannot be used.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Closed-Cell: ITP, Standard Baker Rod; Nomaco Standard Backer Rod.
2. Open-Cell: Denver Foam; ITP Tundra Foam; Nomaco.
3. Soft-Type: ITP Soft-type; Nomaco Sof-rod.
4. Bond Breaker Tape: Pecora Corp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION .,
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Protect adjacent exposed surfaces.
B. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions for .�
maximum adhesion; prime as required by manufacturer.
C. Consult manufacturer for surfaces not specifically covered in application instructions.
D. Installation of sealant shall be evidence of acceptance of substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. Sealant shall be mixed (if multi-component) and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions to ensure complete mixing and an
installed proper width/depth ratio with maximum adhesion contact. Three sided
adhesion must be prevented.
B. Backer rod shall be installed using only blunt or rounded tools which will ensure a
uniform(+ or -1/8") depth without puncturing the material. Backer rod shall be a
minimum of 33% oversized for closed cell and a minimum of 50% oversized for open
cell backer rod, unless otherwise required by the manufacturer.
C. Surrounding surfaces shall be protected as required to ensure no sealant contaminates �^
these surfaces.
D. Both temperature and dampness conditions may restrict application of these sealants.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
07921-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
E. Force sealant into joint to ensure conformance with manufacturer's recommended
width/depth ratios. Tool to ensure full contact with',sidewalls and backing. Tooling
pressure shall cause a wetting for maximizing sealant adhesive contact to substrate.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, finish horizontal joints flush, vertical joints distinctly
concave in shape.
G. Finished bead shall be smooth, free from wrinkles, Eir pockets, and foreign matter.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Remove excess material adjacent to joint.
B. Remove unused materials for jobsite.
3.5 SCHEDULE:
JOINT TYPE:
1. Structural Glazing -Type 2.
2. Glass to Glass (Nonstructural) -Type 3.
3. Perimeter Window Sealant-Type 2 and Type 4.
4. Aluminum to Brick-Type 4.
5. Brick to Brick-Type 5.
6. Wood to Wood and Wood to Vinyl-Type 6.
7. Metal to Metal -Type 2 and Type 4.
8. Metal to Stucco -Type 4.
�. 9. Aluminum to Concrete -Type 4.
10. Concrete to Concrete -Type 1.
11. Stone to Stone -Type 1.
12. Paving on Grade (Concrete to Concrete) - Type 7.
13. Exterior Finish System (EIFS to EIFS) -Type 1.
14. EIFS to Masonry -Type 1 and Type 2.
15. EIFS to Metal -Type 2 and Type 4.
16. Wood Trim to Wood -Type 8.
17. Wood Trim to Gypsum -Type 8.
18. Concrete to Concrete Floor Joint-Type 9.
END OF SECTION 07921
07921-5 Rev. 6/01
I
C-668
SECTION 08100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
„ PART 1-GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide steel doors and frames specified and indicated on Drawings.
B. Provide steel frames for wood doors as indicated on Drawings.
C. Hardware is specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
1.2 STANDARDS:
A. Steel doors and frames shall conform to one of the following standards except as
specified herein.
1. ANSI/SDI (Steel Door Institute): SDI-100-9 Recommended Specifications
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. HMMA(Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association)A Division of NAAMM(National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers): Standard CHMA 1-74,
Recommended Architectural Specifications for Custom Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Hardware preparations and locations shall conform to the following except as modified
herein or in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
1. DHI (Door and Hardware Institute): Recommended Locations for Builder's
Hardware.
2. ANSI A 115 Series: Preparation of doors and frames for finish hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for each 'type door and frame and each
accessory required.
ISW C. Shop Drawings: Submit details for installation and anchorage of each frame type,
elevations of each door type. Include finish hardware location and reinforcements.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as the Drawings.
08100-1 Rev.6101
C-668
2. Provide schedule of glazing frames and stops with glazing requirements.
3. Submit manufacturer's certification for each fire door and frame assembly with
name of testing agency.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors and frames from damage and exposure. Store in dry locations indoors
stacked on wood runners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: No,
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
do
A. Provide steel doors and frames by one of the following:
1. Republic Builders Products Corp.
2. Amweld.
3. Ceco Corp.
4. Curries Mfg., Inc.
5. Firedoor Corp. Of Florida.
6. Habersham Metal Products Co.
7. Pioneer Industries.
8. Steelcraft.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Steel Sheets: Hot-rolled ASTM A569 and ASTM A568 or cold-rolled ASTM A366 and
ASTM A568.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
C: Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel.
D. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard unit hot-dip galvanized
complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable.
E. Shop Primer: Manufacturers standard rust-inhibitive coating.
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. Fabricate door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects,
warp or buckle.
B. Doors: Full flush 16 gauge exterior and 18 ga. interior with honeycomb or polystyrene
core with galvanized and primed finish.
08100-2 Rev.6/01
f
C-668
1. Glass Openings: Where glass lights are indicated, prepare openings in the
factory and provide 20 gauge steel moldings and stops attached with
countersunk Phillips-head screws.
C. Frames: Integral buck and stop profile. Welded for masonry walls and knockdown for
interior walls.
D. Electric Preparation: Where electric strikes, locks and hinges are specified in Section
08710, Finish Hardware, furnish 16 ga. galvanized steel electrical outlet boxes with
knock-outs and install at strike, lock and hinge locations. Extend empty EMT conduit
to head of frame.
2.4 EXTERIOR DOORS, PANELS AND FRAMES:
A. Fabricate of galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as
integral part of door construction of with 16 gauge inverted steel channel.
2.5 INSULATED DOORS:
A. Exterior doors shall be filled with thermal insulation and tested in accordance with
ASTM C236. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated doors with UL factor
of 0.24 or better.
2.6 FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATION:
A. Prepare door and frames to receive finish hardware in accordance with approved
Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
ANSI A115 Series. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware.
Locate finish hardware in accordance with referenced DHI Standard.
2.7 SHOP PRIME:
A. Clean and treat all exposed steel surfaces including,galvanized surfaces of mill scale,
rust, oil and other foreign materials. Apply shop prime not less than 1.5 mils dry to
provide uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
2.8 STEEL DOORS:
A. Provide steel doors of type indicated on Drawings.
1. Exterior doors shall have 16 gauge face panels.
2. Interior doors shall have 18 gauge face panels.
C. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary lowers in doors where indicated.
Fabricate of inverted Y-shaped blades formed of 16 gauge steel set into 18 gauge
steel frame.
08100-3 Rev.6/01
C,.668
2.9 STEEL FRAMES:
A. Provide metal frames for doors,transoms,sidelights,view windows and other openings
indicated on Drawings.
1. Fabricate all exterior frames, all frames in masonry and all frames over 4 ft.wide
of 16 gauge steel (with welded construction). '*
2. Fabricate interior frames up to 4 ft.wide of 18 gauge steel; frames over 4 ft.wide
of 16 gauge steel (with knockdown construction)..
B. Door Silencers: Except on fire-rated frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike
jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-swing frames.
C. Plaster-Mortar Guards: Provide 26 gauge steel guards welded to frame, at back of
finish hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and to prevent mortar from
entering cutouts. .�
D. Jamb Anchors: Fabricate of 16 gauge steel minimum. Anchors in masonry and
concrete shall be galvanized, T-shaped and corrugated or punched for embedding in
mortar. Anchors for steel studs shall be T-shaped with integral stirrup straps for
attaching to studs.
E. Spreaders: Each welded frame shall be provided with a factory-installed spreader bar
at bottom of jambs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: "'
3.1 INSTALLATION:
MR
A. Install steel doors,frames and accessories with approved Shop Drawings, referenced
standards and manufacturer's data.
.0
3.2 FRAME INSTALLATION:
A. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until aw
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary
braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Jamb Anchors: Provide 3 jamb anchors per jamb for frames up to 7'-6". Install
at hinge and strike levels.
2. In-Place Steel, Concrete and Masonry Construction: Set frames and secure
to adjacent construction with machine screws and in-place type anchorage
devices furnished by frame manufacturer.
3. Metal Stud Partitions: Attach jamb anchors to studs with self-tapping screws. .�.
08100-4 Rev.6/01
C-668
4. Masonry: Install anchors in masonry joints as masonry is laid up. Fill frames
with mortar.
C. Fire-Rated Frames: Install in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80.
3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION:
A. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100 or
CHM-1-74.
B. Fit fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
3.4 ADJUST AND TOUCH-UP:
A. After erection, sand rusted and damaged areas smooth and touch-up all damaged
• primer.
B. Adjustments: Check and readjust hardware so that doors operate as intended.
END OF SECTION 08100
A
08100-5 Rev.6/01
C-668
SECTION 08214
SOLID CORE MASONITE FACED DIMENSIONAL DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide smooth finish fiberboard faced 6 panel doors equal to Masonite "Colonist'.
Size and hardware as indicated on Door Schedule in the Plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for each type of door, including details of core
and edge construction and trim for openings.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Package doors at factory in manufacturer's recommended protective packaging.
B. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with NWWDA pamphlet How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install
and Maintain Wood Doors in manufacturer's instructions.
C. Identify each door with same designation as Door Schedule.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Store and install doors only when temperature and relative humidity comply with
requirements of AWI Quality Standard, including Section 100-S-3 Moisture Content
applicable to project's geographical location.
1.5 WARRANTY:
A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's
standard form, signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or
replace defective doors that do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced
quality standards.
B. Warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation.
C. Guarantee shall be for life of installation.
08214-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1. Face Only: Masonite, a Division of International Paper.
2. Core: Florida Made Door.
3. Core: PremDoor.
2.2 FLUSH SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS:
A. Faces: Paint grade factory primed Masonite.
B. Core: Solid wood rail and stile.
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. In accordance with Masonite Door Manufacturing requirements.
2.4 FINISH:
A. Doors will be field painted as specified in Section 09900, Painting.
PART 3 -EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions, referenced AWI Standards,
and as indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION:
A. Rehang doors which do not swing or operate freely or replace with new doors.
B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors from damage and abuse as recommended by door manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08214
08214-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, (if any), along with the General
Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Extent of each type, grade and performance class of aluminum window units required
is indicated on the Drawings and in Schedules.
1. Aluminum window units required are commercial grade.
B. Type of aluminum window units required include the following: Thermal-break fixed
window units with aluminum frame and high-performance Low-E sealed insulated
glass.
Applications of aluminum windows on the project include individual units set in
Concrete masonry walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each type of window including information
not fully detailed in the manufacturer's standard product data and the following:
1. Typical unit elevations at 3/4" scale.
2. Full-size section details of every typical composite member.
3. Anchors.
4. Glazing details and sample warranty form.
" B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product Specifications, technical product data,
recommendations and standard details for each type of aluminum window unit
required. Include the following information:
1. Fabrication method.
2. Finishing.
3. Accessories.
4. Samples: Submit sample 2' x 3' fixed window,unit.
08520-1 Rev. 7/01
C-668
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Requirements for aluminum windows,terminology and standards of performance, and
fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in ANSI/AAMA 101.85
and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum windows produced by a single
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Kinco.
2. Danvid.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window
manufacturer for the strength, corrosion-resistance, and application of finish, but not
less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 0.062"thickness at any
location for main frame and sash members.
C. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other
materials warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with
aluminum window members,trim,hardware,anchors and othercomponents of window "
units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125"
thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel to
receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined
grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do
not expose fasteners. Use fasteners that match the finish of the member or
hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
D. Anchors, Cam Locks and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, cam locks and
window accessories of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated
steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM A 386; provide sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure of 45 PSF. AN
E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type
recommended by the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant remains „
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating. Comply with Division 7 "Caulking
and Sealants"Section of these Specifications for selection and installation of sealants.
08520-2 Rev. 7/01
a
C-668
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. General: Except to the extent that more specific or stringent requirements are
indicated, provide manufacturer's standard fabrication that complies with indicated
standards and that produces units that are reglazable without dismantling sash
framing. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of
window units, and prepare sash for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is
indicated.
B. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are
indicated on the Drawings.
C. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with glass
selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units.
D. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and
practical for applications intended. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of the
"Glass and Glazing" Section of these Specifications, and AAMA 101-85.
2.3 FINISHES:
A. Organic Coating: Provide shop-applied organic coating of the type and color indicated
or selected by the Architect,tested and certified by the window manufacturer to comply
with AAMA 605.2.
1. Provide the manufacturer's standard electrolytically-applied, white Kynar 500-
based fluoropolymer coating of 1.3 mils dry film thickness. Apply coating over
the manufacture's standard substrate preparation including chromate conversion
coating.
B. Window glazing shall be 1 exterior layer of 3/16" Low-e glass and 1 interior layer of
3/16" clear . Provide a five (5) year manufacturer's written warranty for material and
labor for replacement due to seal failure. Provide tempered glazing where required by
Building Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening
is correct and the sill is level with slope to exterior.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with manufacturer's Specifications and recommendations for installation of
window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work.
08520-3 Rev. 7/01
C-668
B. Set units plumb, level and true to line,without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with the
requirements specified under Paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix
to AAMA 101-85.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or
gaskets, as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to the "Caulking and ..►
Sealants" Section of Division 7 for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed
concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashing and other
components of the work.
1. Caulk head and jambs of window units with smooth bead of butyl caulk on
exterior and interior. Color to match window frame.
3.3 CLEANING:
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid
damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows; comply with
requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance.
3.4 PROTECTION:
A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder
of the construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units
will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. Replace
all scratched or damaged units. •
END OF SECTION 08520
08520-4 Rev. 7101
C-668
SECTION 08668
two ALUMINUM STORM SHUTTERS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Furnish and install commercial grade aluminum storm shutters,size, location and style
as indicated in the plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MANUFACTURER:
Willard Shutter Company
4420 N.W. 35th Ct., Miami, Florida 33142
1-800-826-4530
2.2 PRODUCTS:
A. Islander Bahama Shutters/ Commercial:
Provide and install factory finished aluminum "Bahama Shutters" ,sizes an locations
as indicated on the drawings.
1. Construction: 1-3/4"wide louvers framed in 1-5/8"x2-1/2" box beam frames.
Louvers may span a maximum of 26"
2. Material: 3005-1-126 Roll formed aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel painted finish from manufacturers standard range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the shutters are to be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Contractor shall install shutters to wall in accordance with Manufacturers shop
drawings and as directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 08668
o
10800-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Furnish all items of finish hardware indicated on the Drawings, specified herein or
necessary to complete the work.
B. Work not included in this Section and specified elsewhere:
1. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06420, Plastic Laminate Casework.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. The following standards and references are to be used for all work in this section:
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
FS Federal Standards
NBHA National Builders' Hardware Association
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. As soon as possible after the Contract award, and before placing factory orders,
submit copies of a detailed finish hardware schedule for the Architect's approval. The
schedule is to be complete,detailed and itemized to indicate the location, size and type
of opening, with the quantity and the manufacturer's plate numbers to denote the
quality, type and finish of each item required. Attach a list of names and firms and
plate numbers for any items that have been changed or substituted.
C. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. 'Upon request, check the shop
drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the
proper installation of hardware.
1.3 KEYING:
A. Tag all keys. Locksets and cylinders are to be master-keyed. The Hardware Supplier
,. will meet with the Architect and Owner and determine exact keying requirements.
08710-1 Rev. 6/01
I
C-668
Locksets and cylinders will be construction master-keyed. Provide three master keys,
three construction master keys, and two keys per lockset.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver each item packed in individual boxes, complete with screws, keys, tools,
instructions and installation templates. Mark each item with the "Item Number"
corresponding to the number shown in the detailed hardware schedule approved by
the Architect.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS:
2.1 BASIC MATERIALS:
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method
indicated, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and ••
hardness, but in no case of less (commercially recognized) quality than specified for
the applicable hardware units by FS FF-H-106, FS FF-H-111, FS FF-H-116 and FS FF-
H-121.
B. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws.
C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide phillips-type flathead
screws. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)screws to match the hardware
finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work
as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted
finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is
closed, except to the extent no standard manufacturer units of the type specified are
available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where the
bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work under any condition,
except where it is not possible to adequately reinforce the work and use machine "?
screws or concealed fasteners of another standard type,to satisfactorily avoid the use
of through-bolts.
E. Hand of Door: The Drawings show the swing of each door lead (left, right, reverse,
bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the
door swing as shown.
F. Hardware shall be new and free from defects affecting its serviceability and
appearance,with parts properly fitted and working smoothly without unnecessary play.
08710-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or
into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application.
After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in Recommended Locations for
Builder's Hardware by NBHA except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to
comply with governing regulations, including ADA.
+* C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and
countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
D. Key side at all locks shall be installed on the public side.
E. Cut and fit threshold to profile of door frames, with mitered comers and hair-line joints.
Cut smooth opening for spindles, bolts, and other similar items, if any. Screw
thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screw of the proper type for permanent
anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the
threshold metal.
F. At exterior doors, set thresholds in a full bed of either butyl rubber sealant or
polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove
excess sealant.
3.2 OPERATION:
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication
recommended by the manufacturer(graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace
units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for the application made.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
Refer to Door Schedule for locations of specific hardware and door functions.
08710-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Butt Hinges Exterior 1361191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 US32D Hager
Butt Hinges Interior BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 US26D Hager
Lever-sets PB-5400 Series Exterior US26D Yale
Lever-sets PB-4300 Series Interior US26D Yale
Closers 3511 BF X SB US26D Yale
Threshold Type-1 2005AV Alum. Pemko
Threshold Type-2 181AV Alum. Pemko
Weatherstripping 303AV Alum. Pemko
Wall Stops 236-W US26D Hager •
Floor Stops 243-F US26D Hager
Flush Bolts 281 D US26D Hager
Door Sweeps 57-AV Alum. Hager
Door Louvers 800-A1 Prime Air Louvers Inc.
Overhead Drip Guard 810A Alum. Hager
Aux. Dead Bolts 3300 US26D Yale
Coat Hook CD7410 US3 Hager
Silencers 307D Rubber Hager
Pocket Door 9850 Door Kit Hager
Pocket Door Latch 330D US26 Hager
END OF SECTION 08710
08710-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 08820
ARCHITECTURAL STILE AND RAIL DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are part of
this Section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Perform all work necessary and required for the construction of the Project as
indicated, including, but not restricted to, the following:
1. Stile and rail doors of grade specked.
2. Machining of stile and rail doors.
3. Factory finishing of stile and rail doors.
4. Glass and glazing.
5. Doors with fire ratings of 20, 45, 60, or 90 minute as required.
B. Related work in other Sections:
1. Wood or metal door frames.
2. Hardware and installation of hardware.
3. Installation of stile and rail doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit Shop Drawings of all doors included in this Section to the Architect for
approval. No manufacture or fabrication of doors shall begin until all drawings have
been approved and returned to the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for
getting all necessary information for fabrication to the door manufacturer 90 days prior
to the requested delivery date of doors.
B. Submittal shall be made in strict conformance with the Contract conditions. Provide
manufacturer's letter of certification indicating conformance to these Specifications.
C. Samples must be requested in writing with details or aspect of product to be approved,
i.e., veneer, finish, construction, etc. If samples of specific veneers or finishes have
been submitted for approval, doors will not be released for manufacturing until Eggers
has received written approval.
08820-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Doors to be stored and handled at the site in accordance with WDMA 1.S.6A-99. ,
1.5 WARRANTY:
A. The doors shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free from defects as follows:
1. Interior- Non-rated and 20 minute: Life of original installation.
2. Interior-45, 60 and 90 minute: One year from date of original installation.
3. Exterior- Non-rated: One year from date of original installation.
B. Exceptions to fire-ratings, as shown on Plans, that affect the door manufacturer's
specific fire-rating authority shall be brought to the attention of the Architect.
C. Manufacturer shall pay a reasonable charge to remove a defective door and rehang
with a new door provided the defect w as not apparent prior to installation.
1.6 MATERIALS:
A. All custom raised panel doors shall be manufactured using the traditional construction
of panels grooved into adjacent stiles and rails with the stiles tongued and grooved,
and doweled together with glue under pressure.
B. All raised panel doors listed on the door schedule shall be as manufactured by Eggers
Industries, Two Rivers, Wisconsin; or an approved equal whose specifications are
equal to the description in this Section.
C. All exposed surfaces including stiles, mullions,cross rails, etc., shall be manufactured
using 1/16" premium grade hardwood veneer (1/16" prior to sanding) and five ply
construction on all components except panels or as noted.
D. Sticking shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings. Wood shall be the same
species as the face veneer unless otherwise noted. Vertical edges and edges
adjacent to lites or panels shall be the same species as the face veneer.
E. Core shall be Structural Composite Lumber(SCL). Dowels used for assembly shall be
no less than %" x 5". MIR
F. Raised panels shall be manufactured using a three-ply construction. Minimum
thickness of panel shall be 1-1/8".
G. Panel raise shall be constructed from solid lumber matching the face veneer and shall
be rim banded (miter rim). Dimensions for panel raise shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
08820-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
H. Bar and muntin details shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Solid lumber shall be
used. Lumber species to be the same as the face veneer.
I. Standard Face Dimensions:
Stile Face 5-3/8".
Cross Rail Face 5".
Top Rail Face 5".
Mullion Face 5".
sw
Bottom Rail Face 10".
1.7 PREFIT AND PREMACHINE:
A. Manufacturer to premachine for cutouts, hinges, locks and all hardware requiring
routing or mortising.
B. The Contractor is to furnish the wood door manufacturer with an approved coordinated
schedule showing all the data relative to the frame;, hardware and door information.
In lieu of this, the Contractor can furnish frame schedule (including all hardware
locations), approved hardware schedule(including all necessary hardware templates)
and an approved door schedule. The manufacturer can then coordinate the three
schedules, which must be approved by the Contractor.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for boring pilot holes, wood screw holes, mounting
„ holes for face plates and other surface applied hardware listed on the hardware
schedule unless special arrangements are made with the door manufacturer prior to
submittal of Shop Drawings to the Architect.
1 D. Kickplates, push plates, stretcher plates, edge guards and other protective hardware
shall be furnished by the hardware supplier or General Contractor and installed in the
field by the General Contractor.
1.8 PREFINISH:
A. All wood doors shall be completely factory finished using the manufacturer's standard
conversion varnish system similar to AWI System TR-4.
Note to Specifier: Other finish systems may be specified if required.
B. AIF raised panel tongues are to be stained and sealed prior to assembly of doors to
avoid finish line when panels expand and contract.
C. All finished doors shall be individually plastic wrapped.
r
08820-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.9 INSTALLATION:
A. Doors to be stored and handles at the site in accordance with WDMA 1.S.6A-99. (See
Appendix Care and Installation at Job Site).
B. Inspect: Installer must examine doors and door frames to verify that frames have been
installed as required for proper hanging and operation of door. Doors with apparent
defects should not be hung. Notify the door subcontractor in writing of conditions
which are detrimental to the proper installation and operation of wood doors. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Install: Do not deliver or install doors until temperature and relative humidity* have
been stabilized (*between 30% and 50%) and will be maintained in storage and
installation areas during remainder of construction period.
Action of any claim for warp or photographing defects may be deferred at the option
of the manufacturer for a period not to exceed twelve months to permit conditioning of
the doors to temperature and humidity.
Reseal or refinish before installation if field machining or alterations are required at job
site.
Doors shall swing in their respective frames free of hinge binding or improper latching.
Protective door wrapping is to remain in place until all work by other trades is complete
and final inspection is finished. ..�
Rehang or replace doors, which do not swing or operate freely.
D. Clean: Owner is to be furnished with instructions on how to clean and maintain wood
doors. Normal cleaning of wood doors should consist only of wiping with a damp, soft
cloth and light polishing with lemon or tung oil. No other commercial or industrial
cleaners should be used on wood doors as they may irreparable damage the doors. ~'
END OF SECTION 08820
a"
08820-4 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 09224
PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide Portland Cement stucco with shell dash finish as specified and indicated on
Drawings .
B. Provide stucco accessories specified and shown on Drawings.
C. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 05540, Light-Gauge Steel Framing.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A. Conform to applicable requirements of the following Standards, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM C926-86 Application for Portland Cement-Based Stucco.
2. ASTM C846-88 Metal Lath.
3. ASTM C1063-86 Installation of Lathing and Furring and for Portland Cement-
Based Plaster.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for
each item and material required.
C. Submit 12-inch long sample of each accessory.
1.4 FIELD SAMPLE:
A. Construct a 16"square sample of stucco on metal lath for Architect's approval prior to
starting stucco work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCESSORIES:
09224-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
A. Plastic Stucco Accessories:Provide Vinyl Corp. accessories manufactured by Plastics
Components, Inc. (PCI), or approved equal.
1. Comer Bead: #2.
2. Casing Bead: #6658.
3. Control Joints (CJ): #1558.
4. Foundation Screed: #6658L.
5. Inside Comer #3058
B. Cornerite and Strip Lath:Shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet steel weighing 2.5 lbs.
per square yard minimum.
2.2 LATH AND SUPPORT:
A. Metal Lath: Conform to ASTM C 847, fabricated of ASTM 366 steel sheet with ASTM
A 525, G60 galvanized coating. Provide type metal lath recommended by MUSFA
specifications for each application required. "
1. Provide self-furring metal lath for application over painted concrete and other
solid bases in accordance with ASTM C 847.
2.3 PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO MATERIALS:
A. Provide materials complying with ASTM C926.
B. Cement: ASTM C150 Portland Cement, Type 1 or 1A. Masonry Cement ASTM C91.
C. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S, special finishing hydrated time.
D. Aggregate: ASTM C897, clean, natural or manufactured sand. ,
E. Glass Fibers: Type AR, Alkaline Resistant, chopped 1-1/2 to 2 inches long. Provide
Dur-O-Fiber by Dur-O-Wall, Inc., or approved equal.
2.4 STUCCO MIX:
A. Base Coats: Conform to Tables 1 and 2 ASTM as applicable for the type base.
Stucco mix shall contain 1-1/2 to 2 lbs. of glass fiber per cuft of cementitious
materials.
B. Thickness: Conform to Table 4 of ASTM C 926. Stucco applied over metal lath shall
be 2 coat work, 5/8 inch thick. Stucco over solid bases shall be 2 or 3 coat work, 5/8
inch thick.
C. Finish: Medium sized clean natural shell.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
09224-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES:
A. Anchor edge of flange of accessories 8" o.c. to plaster base.
B. Miter or cope accessory corners and install with tight joints accurately aligned.
C. Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, with tolerance of 1/8" in 10'-0".
D. Install corner beads at external comers where indicated and required by referenced
standards. Vertical corners of concrete block shall not have corner beads. Form
square and straight with temporary screeds.
E. Install casing beads at terminations of stucco work, except where reveal molding or
vent screeds are indicated, and except where special screeds, bases or frames act as
caging beads.
1. Where sealant is indicated, set casing bead 1/4"from abutting frames and other
work, for application of sealant.
2. Where stucco abuts concrete or masonry, set'casing bead 1/4"from concrete.
F. Install control joints where indicated and where required by referenced standards.
3.2 METAL LATH AND FRAMING:
A. Install control joints where indicated on Drawings. When not indicated, install in
accordance with ASTM C1063.
B. Stucco applied over painted concrete and concrete block shall be applied on self-
furring galvanized metal lath. Attach lath to concrete and masonry with self-threading
screws in drilled holes and galvanized flat washers. Spacing shall be in accordance
with ASTM C-1063. Furring is not required over unpainted concrete and concrete
block.
3.3 STUCCO INSTALLATION:
A. Base Coat: Stucco shall be applied in accordance with Table 4 of ASTM C962. Base
coat thickness not less than 5/8 inch for solid bases and not less than 5/8 inch for
metal lath.
B. Finish Coat: Mix and apply in accordance with Table 4 of ASTM C926. Not less than
1/8 inch thick of synthetic base and finish coats.
C. Curing: Cure stucco in accordance with ASTM C926.
09224-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
D. Finish work shall be done in conformance with synthetic finish manufacturers published ""
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 09224
•,4
09224-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM WALL BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide gypsum wall board work shown on Drawings and specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 05440, Light-gauge Steel Framing.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide assemblies that have been tested, approved and
listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., Factory Mutual, or other testing agency
acceptable to local authorities and code.
B. ASTM Standards: Comply with applicable require ml ents of the following:
1. ASTM C36-85: Gypsum Wall Board.
2. ASTM C475-88: Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wall Board
Construction.
3. ASTM C514-84: Nails for Application of Gypsum Wall Board.
4. ASTM C630-85: Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
5. ASTM C645-88: Non-Load Bearing Steel Studs, Runners(Track) and
rigid Furring Channels for. Screw application of
Gypsum Board.
6. ASTM C665-86: Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation.
7. ASTM C754-88: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Wall Board,Backing Board
of Water-Resistant Backing Board.
8. ASTM C840=88: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
9. ASTM C954-86: Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board
to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch to 0.112 inch
thickness.
10. ASTM C1002-83: Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
* Board.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
I
09260-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for
each product, system and component.
B. Submit Shop Drawings for details not in manufacturer's data.
C. Submit a copy of the test(s) reports for each proposed Fire-Resistance Rated
assembly. "
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials in sealed containers and bundles,fully identified with manufacturer's
name,brand,type,and grade. Store in a dry,well-ventilated space, protected from the
weather and off the ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 GYPSUM WALL BOARD:
A. Regular Gypsum Wall board: ASTM C36, regular type with tapered long edges.
1. Sheet Size: Maximum length available by 4'-0"wide.
2. Thickness: Shall be as shown on Drawings. „
B. Fire-Retardant Gypsum Wall Board: ASTM C36, Type X. Provide where fire-rated
construction is indicated. ,R
1. Size: 4 foot wide sheets by maximum length available.
2. Thickness: Shall be as shown on Drawings.
C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Wall Board: ASTM C630, %"thick, USG "W/R Sheetrock°
or National Gypsum "MR Board" having core of gypsum and asphalt composition,
surfaced with chemically treated multi-layered paper. Provide Type X water-resistant "
for fire-rated partitions.
2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. Provide vinyl trim accessories manufactured by Vinyl Corp., Miami, Florida, or
approved equal. �*
1. "J" Beads: SB 50 Typical at end to dissimilar
2. Bullnose Outside Comer Beads: BCB 100 Typical at walls
3. 90 Degree Outside Corner Beads: CB 125 Typical at soffits
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
A. Comply with ASTM C475.
09260-2 Rev. 6/01
r..
C-668
B. Joint Tape: USG Perf-A-Tape, and USG Imperial Type P or S for water-resistant wall
board.
C. Joint Compound: USG All-Purpose Ready-Mixed Joint Compound, vinyl tape or
approved equal to Georgia Pacific or National Gypsum Co.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Fastening to Wood: Nails, ASTM C514 or screws,ASTM C594.
B. Fastening to Metal: Screws, ASTM C954.
C. Adhesive Fastening to Wood: ASTM C557.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES:
A. Installation,spacing of framing members and spacing of fasteners shall conform to the
test repot of each fire-rated assembly.
B. Fire-rated walls and partitions shall extend to floor or roof construction above.
3.2 GYPSUM WALL BOARD INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions and the requirements
specified and indicated for fire-resistance ratings.
1. Application to Steel Framing: ASTM C840, System VIII.
2. Application to Wood Framing: ASTM C840, System I or System II.
3. Application with Adhesive to Interior Masonry and Concrete Walls: ASTM C840,
System VI.
4. Application of Gypsum Board to Receive Thin-Set Ceramic Tile: ASTM C840,
System X.
5. Control Joints: ASTM C840, System XIII
B. Space fasteners in wall board in accordance with ASTM C840.
3.3 INSTALLATION TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. Use the same screw fasteners to anchor.Trim necessary flanges as required to fasten
gypsum boards to the supports. Stapling flanges is not permitted.
B. Install comer beads at external corners of gypsum(board work.
09260-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Install edge trim whenever edge of wall board would otherwise be exposed or semi-
exposed. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install U-
trim where indicated and where edge is exposed.
3.4 WALL BOARD FINISHING:
A. Comply with ASTM C840. Apply treatment at wall board joints, flanges of trim
accessories, penetrations, fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for painting or other decoration. Prebill open joints and
beveled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. °
1. Apply joint tape at joints between wall boards, except where a trim accessory is
to be provided.
2. Apply joint compound in three coats and sand after second coat and after last
coat.
END OF SECTION 09260
09260-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 09320
CERAMIC FLOOR TILE, THIN-SET
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide ceramic floor tile work shown on Drawings, in Schedules and specified.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Tile and proprietary mortar and grout materials shall be produced by member
companies of the Tile Council of America (TCA) or TCA Licensees.
1.3 STANDARDS:
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Specification for:
1. Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar, ANSI A108-5.
2. Installation of Grout in Tile Work, ANSI A108-10.
3. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar, ANSI Al 18-1.
4. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar, ANSI Al 18-4.
5. Ceramic Tile Grouts, ANSI Al 18-6.
6. Ceramic Tile, ANSI Al 37-1.
B. The Tile Council of America (TCA):
1. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Latest Edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for all materials
required. Include certifications and other data requited to show compliance with these
Specifications.
C. Samples:
1. Submit two (2) samples of each type and color of tile required, not less than 12
inches square on hardboard backing, and grouted as specified.
2. Submit two (2), 6-inch long samples of marble threshold.
09320-1 Rev. 6/01
AIR
C-668
3. Submit samples of trim and other units for approval when requested.
D. Submit a Master Grade Certificate for all tile, in accordance with ANSI A137.1.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact. Store in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain temperature during and after tile installation in accordance with referenced
ANSI Standards, TCA Handbook, and Manufacturer's printed instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 TILE:
A. Ceramic Floor Tile: See Finish Schedule for interior design selections.
2.2 MORTAR, THIN-SET TYPE:
A. Thin-Set Portland Cement Mortars: Shall be factory-prepared,TCA Licensed products
produced by TCA Member Companies or TCA Licensees. Mortar shall be factory „
packaged requiring only the addition of water for mixing. Use only type of thin-set
mortar to set types of tile for which it is labeled. Provide one of the following:
1. Dry-Set Mortar: Portland Cement and additives conforming to ANSI A118-1. ”
2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Portland Cement and latex additives conforming
to ANSI A118-4.
2.3 GROUT:
A. Conform to ANSI A118-6. Grout shall be factory prepared, packaged, and require only
the addition of water for mixing. Grout shall be TCA licensed products manufactured
by TCA Member Companies or TCA Licensees. Provide one of the following:
1. Latex-Portland Cement(LPC Grout):A mixture of Portland-Cement additives and
special latex additive.
2. Commercial Portland Cement Grout and(PC): Proprietary compound of Portland
Cement and additives.
B. Color: Integral pre-mixed color as selected from standard range.
09320-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which ceramic the is to be installed. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with the applicable requirements of referenced ANSI Standards and TCA
Handbook, except as otherwise shown or specified'.
B. Install tile by thin-set method with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland
Cement Mortar, in accordance with ANSI A108-5.
C. Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
D. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to form a complete
covering without interruption, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges and comers, without disruption'of pattern or joint alignment.
E. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,finish,or built-in
items for straight, aligned joints. Fit the closely to electrical outlets, piping and fixtures,
so that plates, escutcheons and covers overlap tile,
F. Set marble thresholds in the same type setting bed as field tile, unless otherwise
detailed.
G. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay the i0 grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and t rim are the same size. Layout tile work and
center field tiles in both directions in each spaceor area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths.
3.3 CLEAVAGE MEMBRANE:
A. Provide and install synthetic underlayment,adhered'to slab to prevent slab cracks from
telegraphing thru tiles.
3.4 CLEAN-UP:
A. Clean grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials are workable. Tile
face and joints shall be clean and free of all foreign matter.
09320-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Tile shall be cleaned only with solutions permitted by the tile and grout manufacturer's
printed instructions. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from the effects of
cleaning. Flush the surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
C. Finished tile installation shall be clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
3.5 PROTECTION:
A. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during the
construction period to prevent damage and water.
B. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least three (3) days.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and clean all the surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE:
LOCATION TCA DETAIL REMARKS
1. Interior Floors F-113 LPC Mortar
on Concrete Slabs LPC Grout
2. Expansion Joints EJ-171 -
3. Thresholds TH-611 LPC Mortar
LPC Grout
END OF SECTION 09320
09320-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
AW
A. The extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown on the Drawings and in
Schedules.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards for Terminology and Performance: Applicable publications by the Acoustical
and Insulating Materials Associations (IAMA), including Performance Data,
Architectural Acoustical Materials.
40 B. Flame Spread Classification: Tested, listed and labeled as 25 or under by U.L.or 0-25
ASTM E-84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Data, Acoustical Ceilings:
1. Submit copies of manufacturer's product Specifications and installation
instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required,and foreach suspension
system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to
show compliance with these Specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical
units including precautions against materials and methods which may be
detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances.
C. Submit Shop Drawings to describe any portions of the systems not fully shown on data
sheets.
D. Submit 12"square samples for each acoustical unit required. Architect's review will be
for color and texture only. Compliance with technical requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Maintenance Stock, Acoustical Ceilings: At the time of completing the installation,
deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish full size units matching
the units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with
09500-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
appropriate labels. Furnish an amount equal to 2.0% of the amount installed of each
type.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: "
A. Space Enclosures: Do not install interior acoustical panels until space has been
enclosed and is weathertight,and until the space is nominally dry,and until work above
ceilings has been completed and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will
be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 CEILING UNITS:
A. Acoustical Panels, General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lay-in panels of
the types specified. Provide sizes shown on reflected ceiling plan.
1. USG Climaplus Tegular lay-in, 24"x 24"x 3/4"for standard 15/16"exposed tee
grid. Item#76775.
2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS:
A. General: Comply with ASTM C635, for each type of suspension system required for
the type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported by or
penetrating through the ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, partition aw
system and insulation.
B. Structural Class: Intermediate duty.
C. Attachment Devices:
1. General: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung on runners and tees.
2. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel,ASTM A 641,soft temper prestretched,
but not less than 12 gauge (0.106").
3. Carrying Channels: 9/16 x 1-1/2"steel channels, hot-rolled or cold-rolled, sized
for intended loads but not less than 0.475 lbs. per lin.ft.
D. Type of System: Directly-hung system suspended from joists and/or carrying channels
secured directly to joists.
E. Exposed Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard 1-1/2" roll formed steel
exposed runners 1-1/2" cross-runners and accessories of the types and profiles
indicated, with exposed cross-runners offset or coped to lay flush with main runners.
If not indicated, use standard bulb 'T' runners and interlocking 'T' cross-runners.
09500-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
F. Edge Moldings: Manufacturer's standard roll formed steel molding for walls,edges and
penetrations of ceiling, with a single flange.
G. Finish of Exposed Members: Provide manufacturer's standard uniform baked enamel
factory applied finish on exposed surface of ceiling suspension system including
moldings, trim fasteners and accessories. Provide colors to match adjacent ceiling
,. panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION WORK:
A. Begin layout of system at 'base lines' established on the reflected ceiling plans for
ceiling areas. If not shown, measure each ceiling area (which may include several
individual offices) and establish layout of acoustical,units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of ceiling area. Avoid the use of lest-than-half width units at borders,
and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636,with hangers supported only
from the building structural members as indicated. Locate hangers near each end and
space 4'-0" along each carrying channel or directhung runners, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying,either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye-screws or other devices which are secure and appropriate for the substrate, and
which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperature.
D. Install edge moldings of the type indicated at edges of each acoustical ceiling area,
and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of
the work.
1. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening with screw-anchors into the
substrate,through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3"from
each end and not more than 16" on center along each molding.
2. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system to a level tolerance of 1/8"in 12'-
0".
3. Miter comers of moldings accurately to provide hair-line joints, securely
connected to prevent dislocation.
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with recessed suspension system.Install hold-
down clips for each panel where shown or required for fire-resistance ratings. Scribe,
cut and route panels to fit accurately at walls and penetrations and provide moldings
or trim as indicated.
F. If a condition exists where panels of less than 6 inches would be installed at edge
conditions, cut ceiling panels from 2 x 2 panels to match field of ceiling and extend to
09500-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
partition on edge condition. Do not install panels of less than 6" width unless
acceptable to the Architect.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and
suspension members;comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-
up of minor finish damage.
B. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
C. Verify required protection for the acoustical ceilings, including temperature and
humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and
deterioration at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 09500
09500-4 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 09650
WALL BASE
„ PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. It is the intent of this Section to provide for the furnishing, installing and warranting of
the rubber composition stair treads, base and all associated work and accessories
described herein.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Work included is a convenient listing of significant items described within this Section
and shall not be construed as the only work applicable or related to this Section.
B. Work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Rubber Base.
2. Adhesive.
3. Transition Strips.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 09660, Resilient Sheet Flooring.
B. Section 09680, Carpet.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Mercer(Rubbermyte).
2. Roppe.
B. Installer Qualifications: Min. 3 years experience and demonstrated quality of
workmanship.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
' B. Samples: Submit for color and pattern selection by Owner.
09650-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Maintenance Data and Instructions: Furnish 2 copies of list of recommended
maintenance products and methods of procedures.
D. Replacement: Furnish minimum of 1 carton per color and pattern for replacement and .R
maintenance.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Deliver material in unbroken, unopened manufacturer's containers with labels
indicating colors and patterns. Store in dry area and protect from wetting and damage.
Reject damaged materials.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: "
A. Maintain temperature in space to receive tile between 70° F and 90° F for minimum
24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Rubber Cove Base: 0.125"thickness, 4" high continuous roll. Rubbermyte. Color as
selected by the Architect from standard range.
B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommendations. .,
C. Crack Filler: Manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine floor surface to receive base for excessive moisture content or unevenness
which would prevent suitable and acceptable results. Report defects before beginning
work so repairs can be made. Starting of work constitutes acceptance of subsurface
and installer shall be held responsible for good results, to include, but not limited to,
smooth planes and surfaces without ridges or buckles. Re-do unsuitable work, at no
extra cost.
3.2 PREPARATION:
.a
A. Remove dirt, oil,grease, or other foreign matter from subsurface to receive base. Fill
cracks less than 1/16"wide and depressions less than 1/8" deep with crack filler.
3.3 ADHESIVE APPLICATION:
09650-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Trowel on
evenly and thinly to cover only that amount of area which can be covered by base
within the recommended adhesive working time.
3.4 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install base around perimeter of room or space. Unroll base material and cut
in lengths as desired or as required for minimum number of joints. Match edges at all
seams or double-cut adjoining lengths. Install with tight butt joints.
B. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces. Press down so that bottom cove
edge follows floor profile.
3.5 FINISHING AND CLEANING:
A. After installation completion and materials have set,clean surfaces with neutral cleaner
recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Replace broken, chipped, marred or otherwise damaged base. Remove all base
cuttings, material and debris from site.
3.7 PROTECTION:
A. Protect base after finishing and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 09650
w
09650-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents: The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General
„ Requirements, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions (if any), along with the
General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 Scope:
A. Work included is a convenient listing of significant items described within this Section
and shall not be construed as the only work applicable or related to this Section.
B. Work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Vinyl Composition Tile.
2. Edging, if required.
3. Transition strip.
4. Adhesive.
1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
A. Alternates, Section 01100.
B. Resilient Sheet Flooring, Section 09665.
C. Resilient Base, Section 09666.
1.4 Quality Assurance:
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three(3)years experience and demonstrated quality
of workmanship.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Rules of Florida State Board of Education, Educational Facilities, Chapter 6A-2,
Florida Administrative Code.
1.5 Submittals:
A. Samples: Submit for color and pattern selection by Owner.
B. Maintenance Data and Instructions: Furnish two (2) copies of list recommended
maintenance products and methods of procedure.
09660-1 Rev. 6/01
40
4m
C-668
C. Replacement: Furnish minimum of one (1) carton per color and pattern for
replacement and maintenance.
1.6 Product Handling: Deliver materials in unbroken,unopened manufacturer's containers with
labels indicating colors and patterns. Store in a dry area and protect from wetting and
damage. Reject damaged materials. ,
1.7 Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in space to receive tile between 70
degrees F. and 90 degrees F.for minimum 24 hours before, and 48 hours after, installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: "
1. Mannington.
2.2 Materials:
A. "Inspirations". Color-425 Willow Tones.
B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommendations. Color to be clear. Black will not be
allowed. The adhesive shall not contain asbestos, and the manufacturer shall provide
written proof thereof.
C. Crack Filler: Manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection of Surfaces:
A. Examine floor surfaces to receive tile for excessive moisture content or unevenness
which would prevent suitable and acceptable results. Report defects before beginning
work so repairs can be made. Starting of work constitutes acceptance of subsurface,
and Installer shall be held responsible for good results, to include, but not be limited
to, smooth planes and surfaces without ridges or buckles. Redo unsuitable work, at
no extra cost.
3.2 Preparation:
A. Remove dirt, oil, grease or other foreign matter from substrate to receive tile. Fill
cracks less than 1/16"wide, and depressions less than 1/8" deep, with crack filler.
09660-2 Rev. 6101
C-668
3.3 Adhesive Application:
A. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Trowel on
evenly and thinly to cover only that amount of area which can be covered by tile within
the recommended adhesive working time.
3.4 Installation:
A. Tile: Layout work from center of space so tiles at opposite sides shall be equal in size
and not less than Y2 the size. Joints shall be straight and continuous in both directions.
Cut border tile neatly and accurately to fit within 1/64" of abutting surfaces. Install
edging where the terminates against other flooring.
3.5 Finishing and Cleaning:
A. After installation completion and materials have set,clean surfaces with neutral cleaner
recommended by the manufacturer. Apply one (1) coat of non-slip wax, and buff to a
sheen.
3.6 Adjust and Clean:
A. Replace broken, chipped, marred, or otherwise damaged tiles until Final Acceptance.
Remove all the cuttings, materials and debris from site.
3.7 Protection:
A. Protect tile after finishing and cleaning by covering with Kraft paper and use of board
walk.
END OF SECTION 09660
09660-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide carpeting and accessories specified and indicated on Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Carpet shall be installed by a firm with not less than two (2)years of experience laying
carpet as specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Seam layout drawing showing directions, seams, edges and
accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Product Data:Data to show compliance with requirements. Include test
• laboratory reports, manufacturer's certification and installation/maintenance
instructions and recommendations. Flammability test report in compliance with ASTM
E-84 and U.L. 992.
D. Samples: Submit one(1) 18"x 27"sample of each type of carpet required, and 6 inch
lengths of exposed edge stripping.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK:
A. Furnish 5% of total of each type carpet installed to Owner for maintenance. Carpet
shall be in standard width rolls packaged and labeled. Deliverto the job site and store
where directed. All usable scraps shall also be delivered to designated storage.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from
' weather, moisture, and soiling.
1.6 WARRANTY:
09680-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Provide a two (2) year written warranty for replacement of all defective materials and
a one(1)year written warranty forworkmanship and installation, including any relaying
which may be required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 FLAME/SMOKE RESISTANCE STANDARDS:
A. Patcraft"Radical" 10015-15311. Color- Nose Ring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.Place seams in the
directions indicated, and as indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. Maintain directions
of pattern and texture, including lay of pile. Do not seam weft of warp, except as
directed.
B. Extend carpet underopen-bottom and raise-bottom obstructions,and under removable
flanges of obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to
be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated.
C. Install carpet edge guard at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic,
except where another device, such as an expansion joint cover or threshold is
indicated with an integral carpet binder bar.
D. Install carpet with seams taped or sews, or taped-and-sewn, using permanent type
construction which is of sufficient strength for stretching and wear without failure during
the life of the carpet. Apply seaming cement to edges without being in evidence on the
face of the carpet. Maintain straight seams, running true with the lines of the building.
E. Stretch, adjust and trim carpet in accordance with recognized installation practices.
Secure edges in the manner indicated, and as recommended by the carpet
manufacturer. Use power stretchers of the type recommended by the carpet
manufacturer, in areas exceeding 18'-0" in width.
F. Return to installation after period of use, not exceeding one (1)year, and restretch the
carpet once,when requested by the Owner.Trim and resecure the edges as required.
3.2 GLUED-DOWN INSTALLATION:
A. Install a test sample to demonstrate proper adhesion and removal capability of the
bonding system. Demonstrate and remove procedure to Owner's personnel, with
Architect present.
09680-2 Rev. 6/01
Aw
C-668
B. Cut and fit sections of carpet of each room or space, prior to application of adhesive.
C. Apply adhesive and separate release agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, complying with procedure demonstrated to be satisfactory by test
example. Butt carpet seams and edges tightly together, eliminate air pockets, and roll
to ensure uniform bond everywhere.
D. Remove adhesive from face promptly upon exposure.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of.
B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face beater element. Remove spots
and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed.
C. Protect carpet from soil and damage until time of Substantial Completion by taping 6
mil Visqueen or Typar over carpet until all trades are completed and remove prior to
Owner occupancy.
END OF SECTION 09680
09680-3 Rev. 6/01
P0
C-668
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents: The General Provisions of the'Contract, including the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions (if any), along with the
General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 Scope: The work described under this Section consistsof all painting and finishing work
and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on Drawings, described in the
Specifications, and listed in the Paint Schedule included'herein.
" 1.3 Related Work specified in other Sections:
A. Concrete Masonry Units, Section 04220.
B. Gypsum Wall Board, Section 09250.
C. Caulking and Sealants, Section 07920.
1.4 Definition: The term paint or painting as used in this Section in a general sense has a
reference to sealers, primers, stains, oil, alkyds, latex, epoxy, and enamel type of paint, and
the application of these materials.
1.6 List of items included: Without restricting the volume or generality of the"Extent',the work
performed under this Section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
A. The work, in general, includes all exterior metals,exterior masonry,exterior woodwork,
interior metals, interior woodwork, interior wallboard!, plaster, concrete, masonry, and
other items normally requiring a paint finish, unless otherwise specified.
B. Prime coats specified herein will not be required on items delivered with prime coats
already applied, except where there is a request for spot priming such as touch-ups.
(See other Sections of Specifications for primers specified for shop work).
1.6 Submittals:
A. List of Proposed Materials: The Contractor shall either verify, in writing,that he intends
to apply the materials listed in the Paint Schedule, or submit for approval a list of
comparable materials of another listed approved manufacturer. This Submittal shall
include full identifying product names and catalog numbers.
09900-1 Rev. 6/99
C-668
B. Colors:
1. The Owner's Interior Designer will furnish to the Contractor schedule showing
the colors selected and where the various colors shall be used. The Contractor
shall then prepare duplicate 8-1/2"by 11"samples of finish on hardboard or other
suitable materials to simulate job surfaces.
2. Final work shall match approved color samples, except if the Architect so directs
between coats, the succeeding coat or coats may be slightly lightened or
darkened.
1.7 Storage of Materials: All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place
designated by the Architect. Such storage place shall be kept neat and clean, and all
damage thereto or it's surroundings, shall be made good. Any soiled or used rags, waste
and trash, must be removed from the building every night, and every precaution taken to ±
avoid the danger of fire.
1.8 Job, Weather and Temperature Controls:
A. Maintain temperature in building at constant 65 degrees F., or above, during drying of
plaster and masonry, and provide adequate ventilation forthe escape of moisture from
buildings, in order to prevent mildew, damage to other work, and improper drying of
paint.
B. Once painting has commenced, provide constant temperatures of 65 degrees F., or
above, and prevent such variations in temperature which might result in condensation
on freshly painted surfaces. Iwo
C. Before painting is started in any area, it shall be broom-cleaned, and excessive dust
shall be removed from all areas to be painted.
D. After painting operations begin in a given area, broom cleaning will not be allowed.
Cleaning shall then be done only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment.
E: Adequate illumination shall be provided by the General Contractor in all areas where
painting operations are in progress.
F. Coverorotherwise protectfinished work of othertrades and surfaces not being painted
concurrently. Remove all hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, and
similar items, and replace when painting is completed and thoroughly dry.
09900-2 Rev. 6/99
C-668
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The Owner has requested that only Benjamin Moore
Company products be considered for this project.
2.2 Materials:
A. All materials used in the work shall be exactly as specified in the "Painting Schedule"
in brand and quality. No claim by the Contractor as to the unsuitability or unavailability
Vo of any material specified, or his unwillingness to use same, or his inability to produce
first class work with same, will be entertained, unless such claims are made in writing
and submitted to the Architect with substitute proposal prior to commencing work.
B. All paints, varnishes,enamels, lacquers,stains, paste fillers and similar materials must
be delivered in the original containers, with the seals unbroken and labels intact, and
with the manufacturer's instructions printed thereon.'
C. Secondary materials not specified by name and required for the job, such as oils,
thinners, shellac, patching compounds and driers, shall be first grade of a reputable
manufacturer.
D. Paint shall be well ground, shall not settle badly, cake,or thicken in the container, shall
be readily broken with a paddle to a smooth consistency, and shall have easy brushing
properties.
E. Paint shall arrive on the job ready-mixed, except for tinting of undercoaters and
possible thinning.
F. All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the
particular material tinted or thinned.
G. Fungicidal Agent shall be incorporated into the paint by the manufacturer.
2.2 Application Equipment: Select, use, and maintain paint application equipment as
necessary to provide the execution quality of painting as specified.
2.3 Accessory Materials: This work includes all required ladders, scaffolding, drop cloths,
maskings, scrappers, tools, sandpaper, dusters, cleaning solvents, and waste, as required
to perform the work and achieve the results herein specified.
2.4 Colors: Color of the final coat shall match the color selections furnished by the Interior
Designer. Preceding coats shall vary slightly in shade of color. Upon request, finish one
room completely, space or item of each color scheme prior to proceeding with the painting.
09900-3 Rev. 6/99
C-668
Approved color schemes shall serve as a standard for the similar work throughout the
project.
A. Limit exterior colors to three (3), exclusive of trim and accent.
B. Limit interior wall colors to eight(8).
C. Colors for surfaces not scheduled:
1. Access Panels: Match adjacent wall or ceiling.
2. Interior of Ducts Visible Through Grilles: Matte Black.
.f,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection of Surfaces: am
A. Before starting any work,surfaces to receive paint finishes shall be examined carefully
for defects which cannot be corrected by the procedures herein under"Preparation of
Surfaces", and which might prevent satisfactory painting results. Work shall not
proceed until such damages are corrected.
B. The commencing of work shall be construed as acceptance of the surfaces, and
thereafter, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for satisfactory work as required
herein. 4"
C. The Contractor shall provide 8' x 8' panel on wall surface to receive finish, and a
sample of colors selected for approval by the Architect.
3.2 Cooperation with Other Trades:
A. This work shall be scheduled and coordinated with other trades, and shall not proceed
until other work and/or job conditions are as required to achieve satisfactory results.
B. The Contractor shall examine the Specifications of the various other trades and shall
thoroughly familiarize himself with all their provisions regarding painting. All surfaces
that are left unfinished by the requirements of other Sections shall be painted or
finished as part of the work covered by this Section. '®^
3.3 Workmanship, General:
A. The workmanship shall be the very best. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed.
Application may be by brush, roller or spray, at the Contractors option, except as
hereinafter specified otherwise.
09900-4 Rev. 6/99
C-668
B. All materials shall be mixed, thinned, modified, and applied only as specified by the
manufacturer's directions on the container.
C. The Contractor shall have approval of color samples before applying an
y paint or
finish. All priming coats and undercoaters shall be tinted to the approximate shade of
the final coat.
D. The Contractor not only shall protect his work at all times, but shall also protect all
adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of
his work. Upon completion of the work, he shall remove all paint and varnish spots
from the floors, glass, and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all
rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others,and shall
leave his part of the work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions.
E. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting wall. Paint separately
and reinstall after all paint is dry.
F. All materials shall be evenly applied, free of runs, sags, holidays, brushmarks, air
bubbles, excessive roller stipple, and other defects.
G. Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, 'stain, dirt or undercoaters show
through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the
paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
H. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coat.
3.4 Workmanship for Exterior Painting:
A. Exterior painting shall not be done when the temperature is below 50 degrees F.,while
the surface is damp, or during cold, rainy or frosty weather, or when the temperature
is likely to drop to freezing within 24 hours. Avoid painting surfaces while they are
exposed to the hot sun.
B. Exterior doors shall have tops, bottoms, and side edges finished the same as the
exterior faces of these doors.
3.5 Workmanship for Interior Painting:
A. Wood Trim shall be primed before installation with specified first coat material. Sand
smooth and even surface, then dust off. Apply pigmented white shellac to all knots,
pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is applied. Fill nail holes, cracks,open
joints, and other defects with painter's putty after prinking coat has dried. Color putty
to match finish color or stain. Paste wood filler applied on open grain wood, after
commencing, to flatten. This shall be wiped across the grain of the wood with a
09900-5 Rev. 6/99
C-668
circular motion to secure a smooth, filled, clean surface, with filler remaining in open
grain only. After overnight dry, sand surface until smooth before applying the next
specified coat.
B. Gypsum Wall Board and Plaster: Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with
vinyl spackling paste. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes. Dampen with clean
water and fill with thin layers of drywall joint compound or patching plaster. Allow to
dry, sand smooth, and level surface. Exercise care to avoid raising the nap on the
drywall.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Fill cracks and irregularities with Portland Cement grout to
provide uniform surface texture. After priming, fill remaining small holes with Swedish
putty made by mixing dry whiting with prime coat.
D. Ferrous Metal: Remove rust, mill scale, and defective paint down to bare metal, using
scraper, sandpaper, or wire brush as required. Feather edge of sound paint by
grinding, if necessary. Touch-up all bare metal and damaged shop coat with primer
as scheduled. Touch-up shop coat of all items installed adjacent to concrete masonry
prior to caulking.
E. Non-Ferrous Metal: Prior to painting, pre-treat all metal as directed by the
manufacturer of the paint to be used.
3.6 Application of Paint Materials:
A. Apply paint materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions printed on the
container and as specified below. Paint materials shall be evenly spread and smoothly
flowed on with the proper type and size of brush, roller cover, bucket grid and spray
equipment to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brushmarks, air bubbles,and excessive roller
stipple. All coats shall thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. Sand and
dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of five (5) feet.
Coverage.and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt, and/or undercoaters "
show through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until
the paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage at no expense to
the Owner.
B. Doors: Top and bottom of wood doors shall be painted with one coat of primer or
sealer within one week after delivery to job site. Shop coat of metal doors and frames
shall be touched-up as often as necessary to prevent rust from occurring. After fitting,
top, bottom, and side edges of exterior door shall be finished with the same number
of coats as the exterior face of the door. Top and bottom edges of exterior doors shall '
be finished with the minimum of two (2) coats, and side edges shall be finished the
same as the faces of the doors. Prime-Coated butts and overhead door closers shall
be painted to match the adjoining door frames.
09900-6 Rev. 6/99
C-668
3.7 Fixed Quality Control: Unless otherwise directed, each completed coat will be inspected
by the Architect prior to application of the succeeding coat. Only inspected coats of paint
will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.
3.8 Cleaning: Remove spilled or spattered paint from all surfaces. Touch-up and restore finish
where damaged, and leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. Broom
cleaning will not be permitted once painting has begun. Subsequent cleaning shall be done
only by commercial vacuum cleaning equipment.
3.9 Painting Schedule:
A. All surfaces that have been left unfinished by the work of other trades shall be painted
as scheduled below. Where factory primed surfaces have been touched-up. Only the
following surfaces shall not require painting:
70 1. Items with factory-applied final coat.
2. Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit.
3. Pre-finished wall, ceiling and floor coverings.
3.10 Painting Schedule - Exterior:
A. Wood Painted:
1 coat Exterior Alkyd Primecoat(Oil Primer)
2 coats Exterior 100%Acrylic Satin Finish
B. Wood - Stain Finish:
2 coats Exterior Oil/Alkyd Semi-Transparent Deck& Siding Stain
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1 coat Blokfil Interior/Exterior Heavy duty Acrylic Block Filler
2 coats Exterior 100% Acrylic Satin Finish
D. Ferrous Metal:
1 coat All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer
2 coats Exterior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish
E. Non-Ferrous Metal:
1 coat All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer
2 coats Exterior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish
3.11 Painting Schedule - Interior:
A. Wood Stained (Satin Finish Transparent Stain):
1 coat Interior Oil Wood Finishing Stain
1 coat Interior Quick Dry Sanding SealerNamish
09900-7 Rev. 6/99
C-668
2 coats Interior Polyurethane Satin Varnish (Sand, with 220 grit sandpaper, between
each coat applied).
B. Ferrous Metal (Doors, Trim, Steel, Iron, Etc. :
1 coat Alkyd Metal Primer
2 coats Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall &Trim Enamel
C. Gypsum Board:
1 coat Interior Primer-Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer
2 coats Latex Eggshell Enamel Interior Wall Paint
D. Wood Trim Painted:
1 coat Interior Alkyd Primer
2 coats Wall and Trim Paint, Latex Semi-Gloss
END OF SECTION 09900 •
09900-8 Rev. 6/99
C-668
SECTION 09950
VINYL WALL COVERING
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide perforated vinyl wallcovering as specified and shown on Finish Schedule.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers:
" 1. See Finish Schedule for Owner Selections
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for each material, including manufacturer's
installation instructions, and instructions for maintenance.
C. Samples: Submit two (2) samples of each type, color and pattern of wallcovering.
D. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver to Owner at project site,five
(5) lin. yds. of each type, color and pattern of same wallcovering as installed.
Replacement materials shall be packaged and labeled.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Deliver materials,and store in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify
manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification.
C. Do not store wallcovering in an upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area
above 40° F.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain a constant minimum temperature of not less than 60°F at areas of installation
for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after the application of materials.
09950-1 Rev.7/01
C-668
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Fumish manufacturer's one(1)yearwritten warranty against
mildew, delamination and fading.
B. Contractor's Warranty: Submit two (2) year written warranty against defects in
installation in wallcoverings.
C. Warranties shall include cost of materials and labor required to perform warranty work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials bearing U.L. label and marking and
ASTM E 84 fire hazard classifications:
1. Flame spread not more than 25.
2. Smoke developed not more than 50.
B. Vinyl Fabric Wallcovering: Comply with(FS CCC-S-408). Type as specified. Provide
Class 2 mildew-resistant backing. Comply with the requirements of ASTM D 1308 for
determining stain resistance.
C. Adhesive and Sizing: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive and sizing for
use with each specified wallcovering. Adhesive shall be mildew-resistant and non-
staining to wallcovering.
1. Provide manufacturer's strippable-type adhesive for use with wallcovering applied
over gypsum drywall. Provide manufacturer's certification that recommended
adhesive will. permit removal of wallcovering from gypsum drywall surfaces
without damage to paper facing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which wallcovering is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install only when normal temperature and humidity conditions approximate interior +
conditions that will exist when building is occupied.
3.2 PREPARATION:
09950-2 Rev.7/01
C-668
A. Remove wallcovering materials from its packaging and allow to acclimatize to areas of
installation 24 hours before application.
B. Remove electrical, telephone and other cover plates and surface-mounted fixtures
where wallcovering is to be applied.
C. Size substrates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations fortype adhesive
and wallcovering.
" D. Drywall preparation is specified in Section 09260 , Gypsum Drywall.
E. Painting of surfaces to receive wall covering are specified in Section 09900, Painting.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. Place wallcovering panels consecutively in order they are cut from rolls,including filling
of spaces above or below openings. Hang by reversing alternate strips except on
match patterns.
B. Apply adhesive to back of wallcovering and place in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Install seams vertically and plumb, at least 6 inches away from any
comer. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. Place wallcovering continuously over
internal and external comers. When recommended by manufacturer, overlap seam,
and double-cut to assure tight closure, using sheet metal strip to protect drywall. Roll,
brush or use rubber squeegee to remove air bubbles,wrinkles and other defects. Cut
wallcovering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or supports.
C. Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match at seams.
D. Remove excessive adhesive along finished seams using warm water and a clean
sponge, and wipe dry.
E. Install wallcovering with an intimate substrate bond, smooth, clean, without wrinkles,
gaps and overlaps.
F. Replace outlet cover plates and fixtures. All cut edges of wallcovering shall be
completely concealed
3.4 CLEAN-UP:
A. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from
wallcovering installation, and leave areas of work clean.
END OF SECTION 09950
09950-3 Rev.7/01
C-668
SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide and install fire extinguishers and cabinets at locations indicated on the
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Provide cut sheet showing rough opening requirements,finishes and technical data for
extinguishers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Larsen
B. Modern Metal Products.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Extinguisher: MP 10 series. UL Rating 4A-60 B:C (for all cabinet locations).
B. Cabinet: Semi-recessed (rolled edge) Larsen 2712-RL.
C. Finish: Extruded Aluminum.
D. Doors: Vertical Duo, w/Tempered glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide necessary rough opening. Ensure cabinets are plumb and properly anchored.
B. Install cabinets as per manufacturer's suggested procedure. Test and tag extinguisher
prior to installation.
10520-1 Rev. 6/01
NOR
C-668
C. Verify that all extinguishers are correctly sized and located. Provide tagging and full
charging of all extinguishers.
END OF SECTION 10520
10520-2 Rev. 6/01
Nip
C-668
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
IMP
A. Fumish and install toilet accessories as indicated in this Section and on the Drawings.
B. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for
units exposed in the same areas unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
Stamped names of labels on exposed faces of units',will not be permitted.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet
accessory. Transmit copies of installation instructions to the installer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MANUFACTURER:
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Bobrick
2. Bradley
3. Charles Parker
4. Watrous
2.2 PRODUCTS:
A. Provide the following products in quantities indicated', on the Drawings:
1. Side Grab Bar: Bradley 832-001-42"-2, 42" long bar, concealed mounting,
safety-grip finish. One (1) per handicapped toilet. Mount at 33"A.F.F.
2. Rear Grab Bar: Bradley 832-001-36"-2, 36" long bar, concealed mounting,
safety-grip finish. One (1) per handicapped toilet. Mount at 33"A.F.F.
3. Toilet Paper Holder: Bradley 5104 Semi recessed. Mount at 24"A.F.F.
10800-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 3 -EXECUTION:
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which toilet accessories are to be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide wood blocking for all accessories prior to installing gypsum board.
END OF SECTION 10800
.M
MW
Mft
10800-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15001
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General requirements for heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.
B. Miscellaneous material and execution requirements(pipe hangers,sleeves,escutcheons,
equipment supports, etc.)
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The scope of work shall include complete heating,, ventilating and air conditioning
systems as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Specifications for the
mechanical work are provided as follows:
1. 15001 General Mechanical Requirements
2. 15075 Mechanical Identification
3. 15735 Rooftop air conditioners
4. 15810 Ductwork& Insulation
5. 15820 Ductwork Accessories (air turning devices, dampers, flex connectors, etc)
6. 15835 Power Ventilators
7. 15850 Air Outlets and Inlets
8. 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the Architect to
determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the Drawings or
Specifications. The Contractor shall outline his method of procedure and bring up for
discussion and decision any questions concerning the project. No work shall be
performed prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, time and place of
conference.
1.04 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS:
A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this Contract including the Florida Energy
Code. Obtain information on all code restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict
between the Contract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall
be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra payment will
not be allowed for Work required by code restrictions',except through written agreement
with the Owner.
B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final
15001-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
payment is contingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect.
C. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As far as is
practical, similar products shall be by one manufacturer. Where applicable, all materials
and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp.
Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to the Architect upon request.
1.05 STANDARDS
A. Unless modified by these Specifications,the design, manufacture, testing and method of .,
installing all materials, apparatus and equipment shall conform to the following:
1. ASHRAE Standard 90, Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
2. ANSI B9. 1, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
3. NFPA, Standards of National Fire Protection Association.
4. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
5. SMACNA Standards for Duct Work.
6. Associated Air Balance Council Standards for Field Measurement and
Instrumentation.
7. Underwriters' Laboratories.
8. National Electrical Code.
9. Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
10. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.06 SITE INSPECTION
A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before submitting Bid. d
Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and work space
limitations.
1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Refer to the general Construction Drawings which are bound with the Drawings of this .
Work for construction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and Structural Drawings shall
take precedence over Division 15 Drawings (Mechanical Drawings). It is the intent of the
Mechanical Drawings to show the general arrangement of the system and not to indicate
all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required, nor to show exact locations
of piping, ductwork or equipment except where actual dimensions are given. All vertical
piping shall be located in walls in finished spaces unless otherwise noted.
B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to call for finished Work, tested, and
ready for operation, and in complete conformance with all applicable codes, rules and
regulations. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for
the proper installation and operation of the various systems, shall be included in the Work
and in the proposal, the same as if specified or shown on the Drawings.
C. If any departures from the Drawings and Specifications are deemed necessary, details
of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect for
15001-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
approval. No departures shall be made without prior approval of the Architect.
D. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture or
type of construction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be
interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting
competition. Substitutes may be used subject to compliance with requirements set forth
in the General Requirements, Division I, and as approved by the Architect.
1.08 APPROVED ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Equipment substitutions other than the basis of design sheduled on drawings shall
comply in every respect with the applicable schedules and specifications contained in the
contract documents, and shall meet the requirements of any relevant architectural
administrative specification requirements on product substitutions. Equipment scheduled
on Drawings was used to arrive at performance, space, maintenance, and utility service
requirements. If other equipment is submitted and approved, take responsibility for
providing the space, maintenance, and utility service requirements of this substituted
equipment, and ensure the capacities, accessories and features as indicated for the
scheduled manufacturer are provided. This responsibility shall include the costs
associated with any resulting changes during and following installation, including costs
to change electrical service required by substituted equipment, to obtain required
clearances, or to provide missing accessories and features. Approval of equipment
substitutions during the submittal review process or listing of alternate approved
manufacturers in these specifications represents an acceptance of the general level of
product quality and reliability, and does not imply that the alternate manufacturer's have
been reviewed for compliance with the performance, features, materials and accessories
already specified for the equipment scheduled on the drawings. It is the ultimate
responsibility of the contractor to ensure any equipment substituted for what was
scheduled on the drawings meets the contract document requirements.
B. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned .on the Drawings or in
Specifications in reference to his required service or product, and no qualifications or
specification of such is included,then the material gauges,details of manufacturer,finish,
etc., shall be in accordance with his standard practice, directions or specifications. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any infringement of patents, royalties, or copyrights
which may be incurred thereby.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples of insulation,diffusers,dampers or any other mechanical equipment or materials
shall be submitted if requested by the Architect. If j a sample is requested, have the
sample delivered to the Architect or arrange for the Xrchitect to examine it elsewhere.
Failure to comply may be cause for rejection.
B. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for Architects approval before purchasing or
installing the following items.
1. Heat Pumps (outdoor unit)
15001-3 Rev. 6101
C-668
2. Air Handling Unit "
3. Grilles, Diffusers and Registers
4. Exhaust Fans
5. Louvers
6. Control and Wiring Diagrams
7. Duct Shop Drawings (where different from design drawings)
8. Shop drawings for mounting details of air handling units and rooftop heatpumps.
1.10 PERFORMANCE DATA
A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance of
equipment as installed. Make suitable allowances if installation details are such that
actual operating conditions unfavorably affect performance as compared to conditions
under which the equipment was rated.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide four(4)complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item
of equipment used in the Mechanical Work. In addition to the catalog data, installation,
operating and maintenance data and bill of materials for all operating equipment shall be
submitted. Each of the four sets of data shall be bound in loose leaf binders and
submitted to the Architect before final payment is made. A complete double index shall
be provided as follows:
1. Listing the Products alphabetically by name.
2. Listing the names of manufacturer's alphabetically by name together with their
addresses and the names and addresses of local sales representatives.
B. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with
complete instructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic
maintenance, together with the source of replacement parts and service, for the items of
equipment covered.
1.12 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, set and wire all disconnect devices and starters
as required for all equipment except for those items furnished with integral disconnect
devices and/or starters.
B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring requirements for **
all mechanical equipment actually purchased as soon as practical. This shall include all
diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Contractor to make connections
properly. If equipment actually purchased requires larger electrical service than
equipment scheduled, arrange and pay for required electrical service change.
C. Provide all air conditioning control devices, including thermostats, and complete all
control wiring, including final connections.
15001-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
D. Coordinate location of equipment, piping, and duct work with Electrical Contractor and
Plumbing Contractor to maintain clearance for equipment maintenance, prevent
interference with duct and piping runs, and to prevent ducts and piping from being
installed over electrical panels. If interference develops, the Architect will decide which
equipment, conduit, duct, piping, etc., must be relocated regardless of installation order.
Take responsibility for relocating Mechanical work, if so ordered, including all associated
costs.
E. Within 30 days following award of the Contract, report to the Architect, in writing, all real
or potential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Mechanical Work or between the
trades and obtain an agreement with the Architect on a solution. Those reported after 30
days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the discretion
of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting from the progress of Work to the Architect
immediately or accept the expense of corrective work caused by failure to report:such a
conflict.
1.13 CHANGES
A. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval of the Architect.
Changes in design means any change which may affect the capacity, reliability, operation
or safety of the systems or any parts thereof, including changes which may be required
to conform to local regulations or codes.
1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in,manufacturing products specified
in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all materials and equipment against damage and vandalism during construction.
Replace any damaged material or equipment and place the systems in f1 perfect working
condition.
1.16 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1 for
additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for refrigeration compressors against defects in
materials and workmanship. Repair any defects becoming apparent within the warranty
period as directed by the Architect. The warranty sh 11 not cause an obligation to repair
damage resulting from accident or improper operati x or care on the part of the Owner.
15001-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Examine the site and all Drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of
the Work.
B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to suit actual
conditions encountered. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all Work
will be installed in proper relationship and coordinate precise location of parts with the
Work of others.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor. Assume
liability for cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make proper arrangements
in this respect.
D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a given
manufacture. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, ducts, etc., to
connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment
manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and
connection of all equipment. In case of conflict between manufacturer's instructions and
the Contract Documents, notify the Architect before proceeding. No equipment
installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturers
warranty.
E. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will be rejected.
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Supports
1. Where required, install galvanized steel supports under the air handling units to allow
installation of supply and return air ducts and access to filters and access panels.
2. For installations where air handling units are to be suspended from the roof, Prepare °*
and Fumish drawings indicating exact location, weight and proposed method of
suspension to the Architect for confirmation of structural adequacy.
3. For installations where heat pump outdoor units or condensing units are to be
mounted on the roof, Prepare and Fumish drawings indicating exact location,weight
and proposed method of installation to the Architect for confirmation of structural
adequacy. Units shall be mounted level and adequately secured.
4. Prepare and fumish Drawing and Templates indicating all concrete Work required
for equipment furnished under this Work. All concrete required will be provided by
15001-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
the General Contractor. Provide, at the time concrete foundations, bases, or curbs
or formed, all necessary anchor bolt as required for the various equipment in this
Work. Grout all spaces between the equipment blase and concrete supports.
B. Install all equipment to permit removal of coils, fan shafts and wheels,filters, belt guards,
sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance.
C. Arrange equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors and
control components, and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors and of
access panels.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Securely attach manufacturers nameplate to all equipment giving data as to design and
operating characteristics. Securely attach permanent metal tags identifying each major
HVAC component(i.e.air handlers,condensing units,rooftop units,pumps,exhaust fans,
etc.) with the original equipment tag assigned to the component by the mechanical
equipment schedule on the drawings.
B. Securely attach nameplates to all switches, starters, gauges, control devices and similar
items, giving the name and number of the item of equipment to which it is connected.
3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install all piping in a workmanlike manner, according to the best practice of the trade.
Run all piping parallel with or at right angles to building walls and partitions.
B. Install all piping so as not to interfere with any electric lighting outlets, duct work, other
piping, or equipment. Do not install piping in front 'of any door or window and avoid
interference with any such openings.
C. Cut pipes accurately to measurement established at the building and install without
springing or forcing. Cut piping square and remove all burrs and fins before assembling.
Use standard fittings for all reductions in size and changes in direction. Mitering of pipe
to form elbows or reducers will not be permitted. 'thoroughly clean all piping before
erection and make sure the piping is free of all foreign material after erection.
3.05 PIPE HANGER INSTALLATION
A. Attach hanger rods to sufficiently rigid structural building members.
B. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices necessary for Proper support of piping
at comers, tops of risers, etc.
15001-7 Rev. 6101
.es
C-668
3.06 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Accurately locate and set required sleeves pipe duct. Where more than one pipe is
necessarily passed through a singe sleeve as to a unit piping enclosure or other
conditions resulting in larger than 1 /8" gap within the sleeve, tightly pack space with
proper material to form a barrier against sound, vermin, fire, etc.
.w
3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to make
system adjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct Owner's
operating personnel in operation adjustment and maintenance procedures of system
components and acquaint them with locations and functions of valves, control devices,
etc., in the system.
B. The actual time of this service shall be as directed but shall not be less than 4 hours nor
exceed 1 day. Additional time, if required, to fully prepare Owners operating personnel
to operate and maintain the system shall be as directed by the Owner at the Owner's
expense. Quote rates for this additional time in the Bid Proposal.
3.08 CLEANING AND RUBBISH
A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the Work.
Protect and prevent unnecessary induction of dirt and thoroughly clean all equipment
used for temporary heat and/or ventilation.
B. Use and maintain adequate filters in all fan coil equipment used for temporary heat and/or
ventilation. Replace with new filters after construction and before units are placed in
service. Close all air duct openings to effectively prevent the entrance of dust and
construction debris during construction.
C. On completion of the Work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the Work and _
dispose of same. Thoroughly clean and leave in a satisfactory condition for use all
equipment, pipe, fixtures, duct work, etc.
3.09 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Architect will furnish one set of blue line prints of the Mechanical Drawings as issued
for this Contract. Use these prints to indicate accurately and neatly any deviation in the �*
actual installation from the Drawings as issued. At the completion of the job, deliver the
marked-up Drawings to the Architect for a permanent record of the exact location of all
equipment, pipe runs, etc., as incorporated in the job.
15001-8 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.10 COMPLETE SYSTEMS
A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working condition,
as determined by the Architect. Furnish and install as part of this Contract all apparatus
and material obviously a part of the systems and necessary for their operation.
END OF SECTION
15001-9 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15002
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General requirements for plumbing systems.
B. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for underground piping &
plumbing.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The scope of work shall include complete plumbing systems as shown on the Drawings
and specified herein. Specifications for plumbing are provided as follows:
1. 15002 General Plumbing Requirements
2. 15003 Fire Stopping
3. 15140 Pipe Hangers and Supports
4. 15145 Plumbing Piping (piping, fittings, valves, & insulation)
5. 15146 Plumbing Specialties (floor drains, cleanouts, hose bibbs, water hammer
arrestors, etc.)
6. 15214 Medical Gas Piping
7. 15410 Plumbing Fixtures
8. 15430 Plumbing Equipment (water heaters)
1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the Architect to
determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the Drawings or
Specifications. The Contractor shall outline his method of procedure and bring up for
discussion and decision any questions concerningthe project. No work shall be
performed prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, time and place of
conference.
1.04 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS:
A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this Contract. Obtain information on all
code restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents
and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall be immediately brought to the
attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra payment will not be allowed for Work
required by code restrictions except through written agreement with the Owner.
B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits 8nd inspection certificates. Final
payment is contingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect.
15002-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As far as is
practical, similar products shall be by one manufacturer. Where applicable, all materials
and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp.
Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to the Architect upon request.
1.05 SITE INSPECTION
A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before submitting Bid.
Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and work space
limitations.
1.06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Refer to the general Construction Drawings which are bound with the Drawings of this
Work for construction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and Structural Drawings shall
take precedence over Plumbing Drawings. It is the intent of the Plumbing Drawings to
show the general arrangement of the system and not to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories which may be required, nor to show exact locations of piping or equipment
except where actual dimensions are given. All vertical piping shall be located in walls in
finished spaces unless otherwise noted.
B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to call for finished Work, tested, and
ready for operation, and in complete conformance with all applicable codes, rules and
regulations. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for
the proper installation and operation of the various systems, shall be included in the Work
and in the proposal, the same as if specified or shown on the Drawings.
C. If any departures from the Drawings and Specifications are deemed necessary, details
of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval. No departures shall be made without prior approval of the Architect.
D. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture or
type of construction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be
interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting
competition. Substitutes may be used subject to compliance with requirements set forth
in the General Requirements, Division I, and as approved by the Architect.
1.07 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS
A. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the Drawings or in
Specifications in reference to his required service or product, and no qualifications or
specification of such is included,then the material gauges,details of manufacturer,finish,
etc., shall be in accordance with his standard practice, directions or specifications. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any infringement of patents, royalties, or copyrights
which may be incurred thereby.
B. Equipment scheduled on Drawings was used to arrive at space, maintenance, and utility
15002-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
service. If other equipment is submitted and approved, take responsibility for maintaining
these space, maintenance, and utility service requirements and cost for any resulting
changes including cost to change electrical service required by substituted equipment.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples plumbing equipment or materials shall be submitted if requested by the
Architect. If a sample is requested, have the sample delivered to the Architect or arrange
for the Architect to examine it elsewhere. Failure to comply may be cause for rejection.
B. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for Architects approval before purchasing or
installing the following items:
1. Plumbing Fixtures
2. Water Heaters
3. Water Coolers
4. Piping (where revised from design drawings)
1.09 PERFORMANCE DATA
A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance of
equipment as installed. Make suitable allowances if installation details are such that
actual operating conditions unfavorably affect performance as compared to conditions
under which the equipment was rated.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide four(4)complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item
of equipment used in the Plumbing Work. In addition to the catalog data, installation,
operating and maintenance data and bill of materials for all operating equipment shall be
submitted. Each of the four sets of data shall be bound in loose leaf binders and
submitted to the Architect before final payment is made. A complete double index shall
be provided as follows:
1. Listing the Products alphabetically by name.
2. Listing the names of manufacturer's alphabetically by name together with their
addresses and the names and addresses of local sales representatives.
B. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with
complete instructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic
maintenance, together with the source of replacement parts and service, for the items of
equipment covered.
1.11 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, set and wire ill disconnect devices and starters
as required for all equipment except for those items'furnished with integral disconnect
devices and/or starters.
15002-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring requirements for
all plumbing equipment actually purchased as soon as practical. This shall include all
diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Contractor to make connections
properly. If equipment actually purchased requires larger electrical service than
equipment scheduled, arrange and pay for required electrical service change.
C. Coordinate location of equipment and piping with Electrical and HVAC Contractors to
maintain clearance for equipment maintenance, avoid interference with duct and HVAC
piping runs, and to prevent piping from being installed over electrical panels. If
interference develops, the Architect will decide which equipment, conduit, duct, piping,
etc., must be relocated regardless of installation order. Take responsibility for relocating
Plumbing Work, if so ordered, including all associated costs.
D. Within 30 days following award of the Contract, report to the Architect, in writing, all real
or potential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Plumbing Work or between the
trades and obtain an agreement with the Architect on a solution. Those reported after 30
days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the discretion
of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting from the progress of Work to the Architect
immediately or accept the expense of corrective work caused by failure to report such a
conflict.
1.12 CHANGES
A. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval of the Architect.
Changes in design means any change which may affect the capacity, reliability, operation
or safety of the systems or any parts thereof, including changes which may be required "Ok
to conform to local regulations or codes.
1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified
in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all materials and equipment against damage and vandalism during construction. ++
Replace any damaged material or equipment and place the systems in perfect working
condition.
1.15 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1, and
repair any defects becoming apparent within the warranty period as directed by the
Architect.
15002-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. The warranty shall not cause an obligation to repair damage resulting from accident or
improper operation or care on the part of the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Examine the site and all Drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of
the Work. Locate all vertical piping within walls in finished spaces unless specifically
noted otherwise. Such piping cannot always be shown within walls on Drawings due to
their small scale.
B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to suit actual
conditions encountered. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all Work
will be installed in proper relationship and coordinate precise location of parts with the
Work of others.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor including
locations of required pipe sleeves through walls and foundations. Assume liability for
cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this
respect.
D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a given
manufacture. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, etc., to connect
approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment manufacture's
detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and connection of all
equipment. In case of conflict between manufacturer's instructions and the Contract
Documents, notify the Architect before proceeding. No equipment installation or
connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturers warranty.
E. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will be rejected.
3.02 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND PUMPING
A. Perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping necessary for the completion of the Work
in accordance with the requirements of Excavation avid Backfill, Division 2.
B. Excavate trenches suitable in width to provide a minimum of 6" clear space between the
barrel of the pipe and the trench wall on both sides of the pipe. Accurately grade the
trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on
15002-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Take care not to excavate below
the depth necessary and excavate bell holes to ensure proper bedding. Backfill over-
depths with loose, granular, moist material and thoroughly compact to the depth required.
C. Place and compact backfill material in 6"layers until the pipe has a minimum cover of 12".
Place and compact the remaining material in 12" layers. Grade the surface to a
reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding in neat condition as approved by the
Architect.
D. Backfill all trenches passing under foundations with concrete to the underside of the
foundation and at a 2:1 slope away from each side of the foundation. Backfill all trenches
that are parallel and deeper than foundations with concrete to a point that will place the
top of the concrete on a 2:1 slope away from the foundation bottom. Do not backfill
trenches until all required tests and inspections are completed.
E. Repair or replace all topsoil, shrubbery, sod, sidewalks, streets, walls, etc. disturbed by
the excavation, backfilling or pumping to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repair
sidewalks in complete blocks; partial patching will not be accepted.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings
and valves. Carefully investigate all conditions affecting the Work to avoid interferences
between pipes, ducts, valves, conduits, electrical fixtures and equipment and install as
conditions may dictate as part of this Contract.
B. Sanitary Piping: Locate and size sanitary piping within the building (minor in nature)
where not shown on the Drawing in accordance with Standard Plumbing Code.
3.04 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to make
system adjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct Owner's
operating personnel in operation adjustment and maintenance procedures of system
components and acquaint them with locations and functions of valves, control devices,
etc., in the system. *
B. The actual time of this service shall be as directed but shall not be less than 4 hours nor
exceed 1 day. Additional time, if required, to fully prepare Owners operating personnel .�
to operate and maintain the system shall be as directed by the Owner at the Owner's
expense. Quote rates for this additional time in the Bid Proposal.
15002-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.05 CLEANING AND RUBBISH
A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the Work.
Protect and prevent unnecessary induction of dirt into piping,fixtures and equipment. On
completion of the Work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the Work and
dispose of same.
3.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Architect will furnish one set of blue line prints of the Drawings as issued for this
Contract. Use these prints to indicate accurately and neatly any deviation in the actual
installation from the Drawings as issued. At the completion of the job, deliver the
marked-up Drawings to the Architect for a permanent record of the exact location of all
equipment, pipe runs, etc., as incorporated in the job.
3.07 COMPLETE SYSTEMS
A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working condition,
as determined by the Architect. Furnish and install as'part of this Contract all apparatus
and material obviously a part of the systems and necessary for their operation.
END OF SECTION
15002-7 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15003
FIRESTOPPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping materials.
B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether
indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops;
1994b.
B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
C. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the specified fire
ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock
Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
IBM 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814
that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating
Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
15003-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which
may affect bond of firestopping material. ..,�
B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install labelling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
.m
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. AM
END OF SECTION
15003-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Pipe Markers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 1996.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.
C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.
3. Background Color: Black.
2.03 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with
smooth edges.
15075-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.04 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit
around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and
identification of fluid being conveyed. ,M
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment
devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be ` *
identified with tags.
F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic �•
nameplates.
G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping
3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in
clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on
straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side
15075-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
ir
of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
wo
15075-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15140
" PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor,
supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the pipe hanger
and supports as described in this specification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B633- Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
B. ASTM A123- Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) (Coatings on Products Fabricated
from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
C. ASTM A653 G90-Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. MSS SP58- Manufacturers Standardization Society, Pipe Hangers and Supports-
Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
E. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-
Selection and Application.
F. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hangers and supports used in fire protection pipijng systems shall be listed and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
B. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturers name, part number,
and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.
C. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS
SP 58.
D. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data on all hanger and support' devices, including shields and
attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes,
15140-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.
PART 11- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS *�+
A. Manufacturer: B-Line or equal.
.W
2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. HANGERS
1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:
a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger.
b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger.
c. Malleable iron ring hanger, or hinged ring hanger.
d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket.
e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger.
2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger:
a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger.
b. Pipe roll with sockets.
c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping:
a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet
metal shield.
b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:
1) Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
2) Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
4. Insulated pipe-Cold or chilled water piping:
a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet
metal shield.
b. 6 inch and larger pipes:
1) Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
2) Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
B. PIPE CLAMPS
1. When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal movement,
use pipe clamps with weldless eye nuts. For insulated lines use double bolted
pipe clamps.
C. MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS
1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr.
33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8@ x 1-5/8@ minimum.
2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe.
3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:
a. Strut mounted roller support. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on
15140-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
insulated lines.
b. Strut mounted pipe guide.
D. WALL SUPPORTS
1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller:
a. Carbon steel hook.
b. Carbon steel J-hanger.
MW E. VERTICAL SUPPORTS
1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe.
F. COPPER TUBING SUPPORTS
1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.
a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger.
b. Malleable iron ring hanger, or hinged ring hanger.
c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket.
d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger.
2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.
3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for
copper tubing, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
G. PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORTS
1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18 gauge continuous support channel, to
form a continuous support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing.
H. SUPPLEMENTARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
1. Design and fabricate supports using pre-manufactured structural quality steel
bolted framing materials suitable for application', Channels shall be roll formed,
12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" or greater as required by
loading conditions. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.
2.03 UPPER ATTACHMENTS
A. For light commercial jobs with wood frame construction, any material meeting an
approved interpretation of the Standard Plumbing Code is acceptable.
B. BEAM CLAMPS
1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel.
Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load
configuration.
2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws. Top flange c-clamps
shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes.
Refer to manufacturer's recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps
shall be used to maintain the clamps position on the beam where required.
3. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Malleable iron or
forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be as required to fit beams.
15140-3 Rev. 6/01
dft
C-668
C. CONCRETE INSERTS
1. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable, either steel or
malleable iron body. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have
means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes.
2. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be
12 gauge, ASTM A 570 Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with
styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The
continuous concrete insert shall have a load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete.
Select channel nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes.
2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS
A. For refrigeration, air conditioning, hydraulic, pneumatic, and other vibrating system
applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening insert and a nylon inserted
locknut.
B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as
required.
C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or spring
mounts as required.
D. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems, or equal.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. For light commercial jobs with wood frame construction, any material meeting an
approved interpretation of the Standard Plumbing Code is acceptable.
B. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular
cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire,
chain, or perforated straps are allowed.
C. Shields shall be 180o galvanized sheet metal, 12@ minimum length, 18 gauge ..,
minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe.
D. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum
thickness, sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch
shall have a center support rib.
2.06 FINISHES
A. INDOOR FINISHES
1. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper »
colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall
15140-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
be used where necessary.
2. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B633 OR shall have an electro-deposited]green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-
Green or equal.
3. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 OR
have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-Green, or equal.
B. OUTDOOR & CORROSIVE AREA FINISHES
1. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or
stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive
use.
2. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 304 [316] stainless
steel with stainless steel hardware.
PART III- EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. For light commercial jobs with wood frame construction, any method meeting an
approved interpretation of the Standard Plumbing Code is acceptable.
B. Pipe shall be adequately supported by pipe hanger and supports specified in PART 11-
PRODUCTS. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to accommodate insulation
thickness.
C. Vertical and horizontal support spacing requirements vary according to the locally
adopted plumbing code and piping manufacturer's recommendations. Consult local
code and piping manufacturer for spacing requirements. In case of conflict, the more
stringent requirement shall apply. Do not exceed spacing requirements indicated for .
the following rod diameters.
D. Horizontal steel piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3
and 4, excerpts of which follow below.
1. NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM
SPACING
a. '/"- 1-1/4" 3/8" 7'
b. 1-1/2" 3/8" 9'
c. 2" 3/8" 10'
d. 2-1/2" '/s" 11'
e. 3" '/2' 12'
f. 3-1/2" Y211 13'
g. 4" 5/8" 14'
h. 5" 5/8" 15'
i. 6" 3j" 16'
15140-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
j 8„ 9/„ 19,
E. Horizontal copper tubing shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3
and 4, excerpts of which follow below
1. NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING
a. %"-3/4" 3/8" 51
b. 1" 3/8" 6'
c. 1-1/4" 3/8" 7'
d. 1-1/2" 3/8" 8' *,
e. 2" 3/8" 8'
f. 2-1/2" '/2' 9'
g 3„ ,/2# 10'
h. 3-1/2" '/z" 10' •
i. 419
,/2 0 12'
j. 5„ ,/z 13'
k. 6" 5/8" 14' •
I. 811
%11 16'
F. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers,
copper colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape. Galvanized felt isolators
sized for copper tubing may also be used.
G. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
H. Install hangers to provide a minimum of '/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
I. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
J. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. As a minimum,
support vertical pipes at every floor. (Local code may require closer spacing)
Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below pipe couplings or shear lugs.
K. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide
trapeze hangers as specified in section 2.02 C. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced
according to the smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports according to
schedule in section 3.01B.
L. Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment which is not
building structure. ***
3.02 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
15140-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts to be flush with slab
surface.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
in.
END OF SECTION
I
15140-7 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15145
PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASME 816.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1984, Reaffirmed 1994 (ANSI 616.18).
B. ASME 816.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1995, 199$Addenda.
C. ASME 631.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 1996 (ANSI/ASME 831.9).
D. ASTM A 74- Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Ripe and Fittings; 1998.
E. ASTM B 32- Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 1996.
F. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes;
1998.
G. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings; 1997.
H. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 1996a.
1. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 1998.
J. ASTM D 2846/D 2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systerins; 1999.
K. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996.
a
15145-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
L. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 1998.
M. ASTM F 437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPUC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 1999.
N. ASTM F 438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 1999.
O. ASTM F 439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 1999a.
P. ASTM F 441/F 441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 1999.
Q. ASTM F 442/F 442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 1999.
R. ASTM F 493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 1997.
S. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Institute; 1997.
T. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 1997. .,
U. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1997.
V. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,
Inc.; 1996. "
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
15145-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield
assemblies.
B. PVC Pipe: PVC DWV Schedule 40, ASTM D 2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or AS!ME B16.22 wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.05 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Either of the following materials are acceptable:
B. CPVC Pipe: 2" and smaller: ASTM D 2846; larger than 2": F441 Sch 80.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 437, ASTM F 438, ASTM F 439, CPVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. ASTM F
656 primer.
2.06 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. CPVC Pipe: 2" and smaller: ASTM D 2846; larger than 2": F441 Sch 80.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 437, ASTM F 438, ASTM F 439, CPVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM 0 2564 solvent cement. ASTM F
656 primer.
2.07 PIPING INSULATION
A. All insulation materials and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
ratings per NFPA Bulletin 90-A when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard E 84.
Smoke developed less than or equal to 50, and flame 'spread less than or equal to 25.
All coatings and mastics shall be non-flammable in wet state.
15145-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass, ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded,
noncombustible, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vapor
Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yam, bonded to aluminized film;
moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02
perm-inches. Insulation thicknesses shall be as follows: Insulation thicknesses shall
be as follows:
1. Cold Water: 1/4"thick (exposed locations)
2. Hot Water: Conductivity: 0.24 to 0.28 (Btu-in/(hr-ft3-degree F); thickness
as follows:
a. Runouts up to 2" & 12' in length: '/z'
b. Pipe sizes 2" and less: 1"
c. Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and greater: 1.5"
2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.09 GATE VALVES
A. Valves handles in domestic water systems shall have the following colors: red for hot
water service; blue for cold water service.
B. Up To and Including 3 Inches:
1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, FS WW-V-54c bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,
handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends.
2.10 BALL VALVES
A. Valves handles in domestic water systems shall have the following colors: red for hot
water service; blue for cold water service. �^!
B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze,
two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ,.
ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.
2.11 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sleeves shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or pre-formed plastic. Sleeves shall be
15145-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
sized to allow approximately 1/8" gap around the pipe or its insulation.
B. Sleeves through floor slabs shall be alvanized steel
9 pipe of proper size. Sleeves
through floor slabs shall extend 2" above the finished floor.
C. Escutcheon plates for finished spaces will be nickel-plated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and
perpendicular to walls, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of
space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations;
F. Final routing of all piping shall allow for expansion and contraction without stressing
pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Vent piping roof penetrations shall be made
using flashing collars which are designed to allow ,for expansion and contraction
(Stoneman or equal). Where expansion of vent stack; or stack vent exceeds flashing
manufacturer's recommendations, provide suitable offset or approved expansion
device to accommodate expansion. Provide expansion joints and/or loops or
approved expansion fittings as required in all runs of domestic water and DWV lines to
avoid shearing of branch lines at structural members or otherwise overstressing joints.
Submit any specific concerns to Engineer for evaluation. Submit shop drawings of
expansion loops and offsets when requested.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation
of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15082.
15145-5 Rev. 6/01
40
C-668
H. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not exposed. Panels shall be
provided in locations approved by the Architect and shall meet fire ratings of walls or
ceilings. Adjust location of valves/piping when requested.
I. Install all piping in lavatory cabinets and vanities as tight to the rear of the cabinet or
vanity as possible to provide full utilization of the cabinet or vanity for storage.
J. Install all piping so as not to interfere with any electric lighting outlets, duct work, other
piping, or equipment. Do not install piping in front of any door or window and avoid ..
interference with any such openings. Do not install any piping over any motors,
transformers, electrical panels, or other electrical equipment.
K. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
Flash all vents passing through roof.
L. ALL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY PIPING PENETRATIONS MUST BE MADE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY'S UL LISTING, AND
APPROVED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
M. Provide and install permanent metal tags identifying all valves and equipment.
N. Refer to Section 15002 for excavation, backfilling and pumping requirements. **
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
P. Install water piping to ASME 831.9.
Q. Buried water piping shall be at least 12" deep.
R. Install trap primers in accessible locations. Provide access panels as necessary.
S. Maintain water/sewer horizontal separation of 10'
T. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
U. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors with a schedule 40 pipe two
sizes larger.
V. Prior to locating building drain and branch lines, confirm piping will not be placed so as
to run lengthwise under load bearing portions of or in footings. Adjust placement of
pipe as necessary to avoid this condition.
W. Insulation
1. Insulate all hot water distribution piping and all cold water piping exposed ambient ,
temperatures including cold water piping in uninsulated attic space.
2. Use application details in accordance with the insulating material supplies
15145-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
recommendations except where a higher standard is specified herein.
3. Run covering for piping unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. Use
details for covering odd surfaces such that continuous covering with unbroken
vapor barrier is provided. Use these same covering and hanging details for pipes
connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressure to avoid metal-
to-metal contact between pipes and hangers.
4. Provide an insert, not less than 6" long, of the same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish
jacket, on piping 2" or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points.
Use heavy density insulating materials suitable for the specified temperature
range and strong enough to prevent crushing.
5. Cover surfaces of valves, fittings, strainers, and specialties with built-up Insulation
around irregular shapes to form smooth cylindrical surfaces. Cover such
specialties in "cold" systems with special care to maintain continuous vapor
barrier. Cover flanges and ground joint unions in "cold"systems.
X. Sleeve and Escutcheon Installation
1. Accurately locate and set required sleeves in walls, foundations, floors, etc..
Where more than one pipe is necessarily passed' through a single sleeve as to a
unit piping enclosure or other conditions resulting in larger than 1/8" gap within
the sleeve, tightly pack space with proper material to form a barrier against sound,
vermin, fire, etc.
2. Provide escutcheons on all finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or
insulated, pass through floors, walls or ceilings, except in boiler, utility or
,► equipment rooms. Fasten escutcheons securely to pipe or pipe covering.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Fixtures, Floor Drains and Cleanouts: Provide all fixtures and floor drains with traps to
comply with local regulations and as hereinafter specified. Provide exposed traps with
brass cleanout plugs. Provide cleanouts in soil and waste lines as shown on the
Plans and as required by the governing codes. Extend cleanouts for piping concealed
in floor or ceiling construction through the floor above and provide with adjustable floor
level cleanout set flush with the finished floor. Use wall cleanouts for piping concealed
in wall construction only where indicated on the Drawings
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install gate valves or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems,
or vertical risers.
D. Provide check valves on discharge of water pumps.
E. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
15145-7 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within '/z inch vertically of location
indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low
points.
3.05 TESTS
A. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be limiting where
additional testing methods are required by the authority having jurisdiction.
.o.
B. All drainage, vent and inside conductor piping shall be tested before fixtures are
installed by capping or plugging the openings and filling the entire system with water,
allowing it to stand thus filled for 3 hours. If required to test system in sections,
provide necessary test tees, plugs and stand pipe to test the system with at least 10
feet of pressure. Remake all leaking joints and retest.
C. Test all water supply piping before fixtures, equipment and/or hydrants are connected.
Cap or plug the openings, fill the system with water and apply a hydrostatic pressure
of 125 PSIG. Hold test pressure for at least 2 hours. Remake all leaking joints and
retest.
D. Test each fixture for soundness, stability of support and satisfactory operation of all its
parts.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Disinfect the domestic water piping system in accordance with local municipality
requirements. In the absence of a locally adopted municipality procedure, after all
plumbing work has been completed and the system tested, disinfect the system as
follows:
1. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
2. After tests are completed, fill all water supply systems with a solution containing
50 PPM of chlorine and allow to stand for a period of at least 24 hours. As an
alternate, fill the system with a solution containing 200 PPM of chlorine and allow
to stand for 3 hours.
3. Following the standing time, the systems shall be flushed with clean potable water ••+
until the chlorine is purged from the system.
4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination
that contamination remains present in the system. .
B. Deliver a dated letter certifying sterilization to the Architect.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
15145-8 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert
elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can
be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow
preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, and sand strainer.
END OF SECTION
15145-9 Rev. 6/01
AW
.m,
Am
MR
C-668
SECTION 16146
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibs.
D. Washer Valve Box
E. Refrigerator valve box.
F. Water hammer arrestors.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASME A112.21.1 M - Floor Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
1991 (R1998).
B. PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 1992.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAINS
` A.- Manufacturer:
1. Josam Company.
2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc.
B. Floor Drain (FD):
1. ASME A112.21 A M; lacquered cast iron two piece'body (adjustable housing) with
double drainage flange, weep holes, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer,
deep seal trap. Outlet size shall match connecting waste pipe size.
2. Where indicated, provide sediment bucket.
3. Polished bronze funnel or anti-splash rim for mechanical room applications.
• 4. Provide trap primers below lavatories where indicated on drawings.
C. Floor Sink (FS):
16146-1 Rev. 6/01
w
C-668
1. Round lacquered cast iron body with integral seepage pan, epoxy coated interior,
aluminum dome strainer, clamp collar, full grate and half grate.
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.
2. Zurn Industries, Inc.
B. All ceanouts shall have plugs of nylon or brass with raised or countersunk heads and
shall conform to WW-P-401.
C. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas:
1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover,
and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. .«
2.03 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES
A. Box Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements.
B. Valve Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing; Model
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements. . ,
C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel
handles, socket for 2 inch waste, slip in finishing cover.
2.04 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX
A. Box Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements.
B. Valve Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements. .�
C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip
in finishing cover.
2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
16146-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Manufacturers:
I. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.
2. Watts Regulator Company.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc.
B. Water Hammer Arrestors:
I. Stainless steel or copper construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-
WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300
degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure.
2.06 TRAP PRIMERS
A. Trap primers shall conform to ANSI 1018, and shall be provided for all floor drains
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs
with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of
drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete or cast iron access box (paved areas) or pvc
access box (unpaved areas) flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where
contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms,
fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and
exterior hose bibs.
F. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valves on hot and
cold water supply piping to lavatories, flush valves, sinks, washing machine outlets,
dental equipment connections, makeup water connections and refrigerator outlets in
accordance with PDI WH 201 guidelines as outlined in drawings.
END OF SECTION
16146-3 Rev. 6101
*+
.�
...
..,
.�
,.R
.�
.�
•$
C-668
SECTION 15214
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Medical oxygen gas system (Piping &Valves only).
B. Medical compressed air system (Piping &Valves only)'.
C. Medical vacuum system (Piping &Valves only).
D. Nitrous oxide system (Piping &Valves only).
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15075- Mechanical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1984, Reaffirmed 1994 (ANSI 816.18).
B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1995, 1998 Addenda.
C. ASTM B 88- Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 1999.
D. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);
1999.
E. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 1999.
F. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40; 1999.
G. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 1996a.
H. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American
Welding Society; 1992.
I. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1993.
15214-1 Rev. 6/01
OR
All!
C-668
J. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996.
K. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,
Inc.; 1996.
L. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities; National Fire Protection Association;
1999.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Factory Preparation: Wash inside of copper pipe and copper fitting with hot solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed 1 lb to 3 gal of water; rinse with
water, and blow dry with oil-free dry nitrogen or compressed air.
B. Oxygen, Compressed Air, Nitrous Oxide, Nitrogen Systems, Aboveground:
1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), drawn.
2. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 816.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 silver braze.
C. Oxygen, Compressed Air, Nitrous Oxide, Nitrogen Systems, Buried:
1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), annealed.
2. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 silver braze.
D. Oral Evacuation Systems (Vacuum system):
1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 or 1220, Schedule 40.
2. Fittings: ASTM D 2466, PVC long radius or wye type.
3. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D 2564 cement.
2.02 VALVES
A. Factory Preparation for Oxygen Service: Disassemble, clean, degrease, seal, and
pack for shipping.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Requirements: Comply with MSS SP-110; bronze body, three piece, double-seal
ball valves with replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals, for minimum
600 psi cold working pressure, flange or union mounting, labelled for intended
service.
15214-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Ball Valves (Oral Evacuation (Vacuum) Systems Only)I:
1. PVC body, double-seal ball valves with replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and
stem seals, for minimum 100 psi working pressure, designed especially for
vacuum service.
2.03 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Hangers and Supports: MSS SP-58 with types as required by MSS SP-69.
B. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated flexible, single ply, seamless or seam-welded tubing
of stainless steel or bronze or reinforced teflon bellows or hose.
C. Valve Cabinets:
1. Specified and provided by Medical Equipment Consultant. Installed by contractor
as directed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
2. Cabinet Labels: Labelled and color coded for intended service and area served.
D. Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive adhesive tape and decals, color and labelling
to conform with NFPA 99.
2.04 OUTLETS
A. Specified and provided by Medical Equipment Consultant. Installed by contractor as
directed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
2.05 NITROUS OXIDE MANIFOLD
A. Specified and provided by Medical Equipment Consultant. Installed by contractor as
directed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
2,06 MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
A. Specified, provided and installed by Medical Equipment Consultant. Contractor shall
provide air intake piping as shown on drawings or as directed by Medical Equipment
Consultant.
2.07 ORAL EVACUATION (VACUUM) PUMPS
A. Specified, provided and installed by Medical Equipment Consultant. Contractor shall
provide vacuum piping, floor sink for drainage and exhaust line as shown on drawings
or as directed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
2.08 OXYGEN MANIFOLD
A. Specified and provided by Medical Equipment Consultant. Installed by contractor as
directed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
15214-3 Rev. 6/01
j
C-668
2.09 ALARM SYSTEM
A. Specified, provided and installed by Medical Equipment Consultant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 99.
B. Pre-Installation Cleaning: Disassemble positive pressure gas systems pipe, fittings,
valves, and components, except those supplied cleaned and prepared for intended
service, and thoroughly wash in hot solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium
phosphate mixed 1 Ib to 3 gal of water. After washing, rinse with water, dry and cap
until installation.
C. Braze joints in pipe and tubing. Avoid leaving excess flux inside of pipe and fittings.
During brazing of pipe connections, purge interior of pipe continuously with nitrogen.
D. Effect changes in size with reducing fittings. Make changes in direction of required
turns or offsets with fittings or tubing shaped by bending tools. Make bends free of
flattening, buckling or thinning of tube wall.
E. Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
F. Grade piping down in direction of flow.
G. Provide pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and
partitions. Finish flush at both ends. Extend 2 inches above finished floors. Pack
space between pipe or tubing and sleeve, and calk.
H. Identify piping with tape and decals. Provide piping identification code and schematic
for installation under provisions of NFPA 99. Install labelling on pipe at intervals of not
more than 20 feet and at least once in each room and each story traversed by
pipeline.
I. Support gas piping with pipe hooks or hangers suitable for size of pipe.
J. Except where indicated otherwise or in flush wall mounted cabinets, install manual
shut off valves with stem vertical and accessible for operation and maintenance.
K. Provide medical air compressors and vacuum pumps with water supply piped from •-
potable water system as directed by Medical Equipment Consultant. Provide reduced
pressure back flow preventer on water supply.
15214-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND PRESSURE TESTING
A. After erection of pipe and tubing but prior to installation of service outlet valves, blow
systems clear of free moisture and foreign matter with'l nitrogen gas.
B. Install service outlet valves, subject system to test pressure of 150 psi with nitrogen or
dry compressed air. Check with soapy water. Provide 24-hour standing pressure test.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following certification of systems:
B. Certify system is complete, zone valves installed, alarm systems functional, and tests
performed. Document tests and submit.
C. Reduce pressure in piping systems other than ',system under investigation to
atmospheric.
D. Test system with dry compressed air or dry nitrogen with test pressure in piping
system at 50 psi.
E. Check each station outlet of every piping system to determine test gas is dispensed
only from outlet of system under investigation. Measure pressure with gage attached
to specific adaptor. Do not use universal adaptors.
F. Disconnect test gas and connect proper gas to each system. Purge entire system to remove test gas. Check with analyzer suitable for gas installed.
END OF SECTION
III
15214-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water closets.
B. Lavatories.
I
C. Sinks.
D. Electric water coolers.
E. Showers.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900- Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z124.2 -American National Standard for Plastic Shower Units; 1995.
B. ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers; Air-
Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994.
C. ASME A112.18.1 M - Plumbing Fixture Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 1996.
D. ASME Al 12.19.1 M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Futures; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R1999).
E. ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 1998.
F. ASME A112.19.3M - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential
Use); The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1987 (R1996).
G. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed 'Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R1959).
1.04 WARRANTY
I'
15410-1 Rev. 6/01
No
C-668
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The following specifications supplement the fixtures as scheduled on the drawings.
See schedule for approved manufacturer's/models.
B. Prior to ordering fixtures, confirm dimensional fit-up requirements for DWV piping
layouts, framing/millwork, faucet trim holes, etc., and coordinate any required
adjustments to ensure proper fit, form and function of each fixture.
2.02 WATER CLOSETS (TANK TYPE) . ,
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all water closets shall comply with the following
requirements: 1.6 GPF floor mounted, vitreous china (ASME Al 12.19.2M), close
coupled with elongated rim, insulated tank. Provide open front, white plastic seat,
hinged, without cover, compatible with toilet. Provide all required fittings for complete
installation including, but not limited to, lever flushing valve, bolt caps, 1/2" flexible
supply, escutcheon plate, and stop valve.
B. All water closets identified on drawings as "ADA" or "Handicapped" shall have
mounting height of 17" to 19" inches as measured from the finished floor to the top of
seat.
2.03 LAVATORIES •+
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all lavatories shall comply with the following requirements:
Vitreous china (ASME Al 12.19.2M) with front overflow, drillings for required trim, 1/2"
flexible supplies, escutcheon plates and stop valves. Countertop lavatories shall be
sealed, underhung. Exposed traps and arms shall be brass with cleanout. Faucets
(ASME Al 12.18.1 M) shall limit flow to 0.5 GPM at 80 PSI.
B. All lavatories identified on drawings as "ADA" or "Handicapped" shall be mounted with
rim or counter surface no higher than 34" above finished floor, with at least 29" height
from finished floor to bottom of apron, and knee &toe clearance as identified in Florida **
Accessibility Code, Fig. 31. Provide offset waste as required. Controls shall be
operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the
wrist, and shall activate with less than 5 lbs of force. Provide ADA compliant
protective shielding for piping and all sharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatory.
15410-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
f
2.04 SINKS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sinks shall comply with the following requirements:
Stainless steel (ASME A112.19.3M), sealed, underhung, undercoated with required
drillings for required trim, 1/2" flexible supplies, escutcheon plates and stop valves.
Exposed traps and arms shall be brass with cleanout. Faucets (ASME A112.18.1 M)
shall limit flow to 2.5 GPM at 80 PSI.
? 2.05 SHOWERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all showers shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Provide shower pan (minimum 2" deep) for tiled or sectional showers, and where
not already integrated with an insert cabinet. All joints between pans and drains,
as well as shower sections shall be sealed.
2. Trim. Removable chrome plated 3" minimum strainer, tailpiece, ASSE 1016
pressure balance mixing valve with 2.5 GPM maximum ball shower head and
escutcheon plate. Drain shall have approved weephole for drainage of water from
shower pan.
3. All showers identified on drawings as "ADA" or "Handicapped" shall comply with
the following: shower stalls and location of controls shall meet the dimensional
criteria of the Florida Accessibility Code, latest edition, and shall include ADA seat
and grab gars. A shower spray unit with a 60" long hose that can be used as a
fixed shower head and as a hand held shower shall be provided. Controls shall
be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or
twisting of the wrist, and shall activate with less than 5 lbs of force.
2.06 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com.
2. Haws Corporation: www.hawsco.com.
B. Fountain:
1. ARI 1010, ASME A112.1.2; surface handicappedl! mounted electric water cooler
with stainless steel top, galvanized structural steel chassis elevated anti-squirt
bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push bar, mounting
bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser.
a. Capacity: 4 gpm of 50 degree F water with',inlet at 80 degree F and room
temperature of 90 degree F.
b. Electrical: Maximum 1/5 hp compressor, 6 foot cord and plug for connection
• to electric wiring system including grounding connector.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
15410-3 Rev. 6/01
C,668
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C. Confirm with cabinet makers and framers in advance to properly size cutouts and
make other provisions necessary for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks
prior to purchasing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in
fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900,
color to match fixture.
F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended
hold fixture in place.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings 404,
before rough-in and installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust shower shower mixing valves to limit outlet temperature to 110 degrees F.
B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, •it
or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
15410-4 Rev. 6/01
.w
C-668
I
B. Do not permit use of fixtures until all required testing,',sterilization, and final inspections
are completed and acceptable.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. See Drawings for fixture schedule.
END OF SECTION
a�a
15410-5 Rev. 6/01
.,�
:a
.a
.�
C-668
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999.
B. UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 1996.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of
products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented
experience.
B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and
rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label
C. Standards: Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance
with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
1.04 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Water Heaters: NSF approved.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS
A. A.O. Smith Corporation: www.aosmith.com.
15430-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Rheem Manufacturing Company.
C. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements.
2.02 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
B. Performance: as scheduled on drawings.
C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber;
encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range
from 120 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls
and electrical junction box.
E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode,
inlet and outlet heat traps, expansion tank, vacuum breaker and ASME temperature
and pressure relief valve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to UL and
other listing requirements.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating
system.
END OF SECTION
15430-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15735
PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged roof top unit.
B. Unit controls.
C. Roof mounting curb and base.
D. Maintenance service.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-
Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994.
B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute; 1995.
C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 1999.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and
assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical
characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection
requirements, and include start-up instructions.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts
listing.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
15735-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668 ..,
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged air
conditioner.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
B. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in
place, ready for immediate installation of units. Leave factory shipping covers in place Not
until installation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors.
Provide parts warranty for one year from start up or 18 months from shipment,
whichever occurs first.
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period
between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.
L*
C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance
data, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt
replacement, and controls check-out, adjustments, and recalibration.
D. Submit copy of service call work order or report, and include description of work
performed.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one set of filters.
PART 2 PRODUCTS *�
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
15735-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. The Trane Company.
B. The Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com.
C. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements.
1. In addition to Section 1600 requirements, if a manufacturer other than the basis of
design is selected, contractor shall be responsible for integration of all system
components to ensure a complete and working System which complies with the
capacity and control requirements identified in drawings and specifications of this
contract. In addition, contractor shall be responsible for all mechanical, electrical,
and architectural modifications required for a code compliant physical fit without
sacrifice in performance.
2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. General: Roof mounted units having electric heating elements and electric
refrigeration.
B. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of
cabinet and frame, supply fan, electric heating elements, controls, air filters, refrigerant
cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan, outside air damper,
rain hood with screen.
C. Capacity shall be as scheduled, based on ARI Standard 210.
D. Unit shall be fully charged with R-22, and factory run tested.
E. Unit shall be dedicated downflow or horizontal flow as scheduled.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with painted finish, salt spray tested for 1000 hours per
ASTM 8117. , including access panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type
fasteners, or screws. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage, with access
doors or panels of minimum 20 gage.
" B. Insulation: 1/2 inch thick glass fiber with edges protected from erosion on all external
surfaces in contact with supply and return airstream.
2.04 SUPPLY FAN
A. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,
adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, (multispeed fan for units 5 tons and below) and
rubber isolated hinge mounted motor. Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated
and have internal thermal overload protection. Shafts shall be keyed. Provide self-
Owl
15735-3 Rev. 6/01
IA
C-668
aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings.
1. Over 5 tons: High and low static drives and oversized motors shall be available
for high static and low static applications.
2.05 ROOF CURB
A. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high 16 gauge galvanized or zinc coated steel,
channel frame with supply and return gasketing, nailer strips. ,.
2.06 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL
A. Helical nickel-chrome resistance wire coil heating elements with refractory ceramic
support bushings easily accessible with automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in
magnetic contactors, galvanized steel frame, control circuit transformer and fuse, load
fuses as required. Electric heat modules shall be UL listed or CSA certified.
2.07 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with pvc drain pan and external
connections. Provide multiple circuits to match stages as scheduled on drawings.
Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory
lok
pressure test at 450 psig (200 psig for 5 tons and less) and leak test at 200 psig.
B. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity
and less, and thermostatic expansion valves and split face circuiting for units 7.5 tons
cooling capacity and larger.
2.08 COMPRESSOR
A. Provide hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive
lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload
protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier. Motor
shall be internally isolated on springs. Units greater than 5 tons shall have oil pump.
B. Timed delay compressor start.
C. For units 7.5 tons and greater: Provide step capacity control by cycling compressors.
D. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge
muffler, flow control check valve, and solid-state defrost control.
2.09 CONDENSER COIL
A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows. Provide
multiple circuits to match stages as scheduled on drawings. Factory pressure test to
450 psig.
15735-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Provide direct drive, dynamically balanced propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan
guard, motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor.
2.10 MIXED AIR CASING
A. Dampers: Provide manual outside air dampers for fixed outside air quantity.
2.11 OPERATING CONTROLS
A. Provide factory-wired roof top units with 24 volt control circuit with control
transformers, contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Contractor to
provide field-installed unit-mounted disconnect switch. Units shall have single point
power connections. Field wiring of zone controls to be NEC Class 2.
B. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor
slugging by interrupting compressor operation.
2.12 THERMOSTAT
A. Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostat to control heater stages in sequence
with delay between stages, compressor and condenser fan, and supply fan to
maintain temperature setting.
1. Include system selector switch (heat-off-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on).
2. Provide double acting thermostat with minimum 1 stage heating and 1 stage
cooling.
3. Locate thermostat in room in path of return air. Do not locate in direct path of
supply air or on exterior wall.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A.
C. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb to match slope in roof (if any),
providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof
15735-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
mounting curb level.
END OF SECTION
.a
-�
15735-6 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15810
DUCTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.
B. Nonmetal ductwork.
C. Duct Insulation.
D. Duct cleaning.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15086- Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.
B. Section 15820- Duct Accessories.
C. Section 15850-Air Outlets and Inlets.
D. Section 15950- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1997a.
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification ,for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;
1999a.
C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 1999.
D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition
with Addendum No. 1.
E. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 1996.
F. NAIMA- North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association.
15810-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.
Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE
table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for duct connections.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS `
A. The following requirements are for the different materials allowed to be used for this
project. See schedule at the end of Part 3 for acceptable locations for different duct
materials.
B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS
Type B, with G60/Z180 coating.
C. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive
supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene
vapor barrier film.
a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.
b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. w.
D. Fibrous Glass Ducts:
1. Manufacturers:
a. KNAUF.
b. Substitutions: See Section 15001 - Requirements. See Section 01600 -
Product Requirements.
2. UL 181: 1-1/2 inch thick rigid glass fiber with aluminum foil, glass scrim and kraft
or plastic jacket vapor barrier; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F., with
factory molded shiplap joints. The air stream surface shall be impregnated with a
polymer coating. The duct shall be suitable for heating and cooling systems, and
designated for operating conditions up to 250 degrees F. 5000 fpm velocity, and
2" static pressure (supply and return).
15810-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
3. Pressure sensitive tape shall have acrylic based adhesive and shall comply with
UL 181A. Rubber based adhesives are not approved.
4. Material shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 25 or a smoke developed
rating of 50, and shall fully comply with requirements of NFPA 90A.
5. Water vapor transmission rate shall be less than 0.02 perms.
E. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one
end, or continuously threaded.
2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing
for operating pressures indicated.
2.03 DUCT INSULATION
A. General: Fibrous glass ductwork (ductboard) shall incorporate the R-value and vapor
barrier requirements contained in the following.
B. General: Duct insulation shall be the required thickness and material to provide a
minimum thermal resistance "R" of 4.2. Rating shall be at 75 degrees F, tested in
" accordance with ASTM C-518 or ASTM C-177.
C. Coverings and linings shall have a flamespread rating of not over 25 without evidence
of continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of not over 50,
and shall not flame, flow, smolder or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C
411 at the designated maximum service temperature.
D. For determination of R-value of flexible duct wrap, the installed wrap shall have an
assumed thickness of 75% of the nominal thickness, allowing for 25% compression.
E. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value : ASTM C 518, 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.
F. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluIminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.02 perm.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
G. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
15810-3 Rev. 6/01
A"
C-668
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. General
1. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes
inside lining.
2. Provide 45 degree entry on all tees used for branch duct to main duct
connections. Splitters and extractors shall not be used unless specifically called
for on drawings.
3. Use spin-in fittings (no scoop) with manual volume dampers for all diffuser and
grille connection takeoffs, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
4. Install flexible duct connections to diffusers and grilles with a minimum run (not to
exceed 6'). Bends shall have a minimum radius of 1-1/2 times the diameter of the Am
duct as measured from the centerline. Collars shall be inserted into the flexible
duct a minimum of 1" before fastening. Support flexible duct from building
structure to minimize bends and sags. Duct shall be fully extended. Do not lay
on light fixtures or ceiling.
5. Make all ductwork connections to air handier units, including fan terminal units,
with flexible connectors.
6. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on
open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
7. Provide air foil turning vanes for all rectangular elbows where indicated on
drawings. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of
perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Construct T's, bends, and elbows
with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline where radiused
fittings are called for in drawings.
8. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45
degrees convergence downstream. ,
C. Fibrous Glass Duct (Ductboard)
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install fibrous glass ducts in accordance with NAIMA Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of
fabrication and installation at beginning of installation. See schedule below for
acceptable locations for fibrous glass ducts.
3. Fabricate in accordance with NAIMA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standard,
and manufacturer's recommendation in accordance with the UL 181 listing.
4. Machine fabricate fibrous glass ducts and fittings. Make only minor on site
manual adjustments.
5. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be sealed with pressure sensitive tape in .�.
accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Do not use fibrous glass ducts within 12 inches of electric or fuel fired heaters.
15810-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
D. Metal Duct
1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,
reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated on equipment
schedules. As a minimum, all ductwork shall meet the sealing requirements of
Class C as set forth in Table 1-2 of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
3.02 CLEANING:
A. Clean Fibrous Glass Duct in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 INSULATION
A. General: This Section does not apply to fibrous ductwork.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature (all supply, return, and
outside air ducts):
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct
penetrations, except fire rated walls as noted on drawing .
4. Install insulation adjacent to duct mounted electric heaters in accordance with
heater manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure duct coverings are
interrupted at the immediate area of operation of heater as required to meet
the clearances specified as a condition of the equipment listing.
3.04 SCHEDULES:
A. Ductwork Material
1. Low Pressure Supply(Heating Systems): Fibrous Glass Duct Board, or Steel.
2. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Fibrous Glass Duct Board,
or Steel
3. Return: Fibrous Glass Duct Board, Steel
4. General Exhaust: Steel
5. Outside Air Intake: Steel
B. Ductwork Pressure Class:
1. Supply (Heating Systems): 1 inch.
2. Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1 inch.
3. Return and Relief: 1 inch.
4. General Exhaust: '/z inch.
5. Outside Air Intake: '/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
15810-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air turning devices.
B. Backdraft dampers.
C. Duct access doors.
D. Duct test holes.
E. Fire dampers.
F. Flexible duct connections.
G. Volume control dampers.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15810- Ducts.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 1999.
B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition
with Addendum No. 1.
C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; 1993.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
15820-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TURNING VANE ELBOWS
A. Turning Vanes shall be double thickness with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes
fabricated/manufactured in accordance with Smacna Duct Construction Standards.
2.02 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. Branch connection fittings shall be the 45 degree entry type fabricated and installed in
accordance with Smacna Duct Construction Standards.
2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. "
2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated.
2.05 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches,
neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
2.06 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin Manufacturing.
2. Substitutions: As allowed by Section 15001. '
B. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125
inch ceramic fiber on top side and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with
locking clip.
C. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring,
and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.
D. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless
steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out
of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height.
An
E. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated
15820-2 Rev. 6/01
r
C-668
- steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for
combination fire/balancing dampers.
2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA
90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
2.08 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin Manufacturing.
2. Substitutions: As allowed by Section 15001.
B. As a minimum, all dampers shall have the following features:
1. Molded synthetic sleeve type bearings, corrosion resistant.
2. Square or hexagonal axles positively locked into the damper blade.
3. Externally visible position indicators with wing nut locking device
C. Single Blade Manual Volume Dampers
1. Round: Ruskin MDRS25 or equal.
2. Rectangular: Ruskin MD25 or equal.
D. Splitter Dampers:
E. Opposed blade balancing dampers shall be 16 gauge,minimum galvanized steel with
zinc-plated hardware and bronze or nylon bearings. Blades shall not be over 8" wide.
Maximum leakage shall be less than 1% at a static pressure of 4"w.g.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and
follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 15810 for duct
construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust d! ucts where indicated.
15820-3 Rev. 6/01
�I
C-668
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,
fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and
elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance
with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for
shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only.
Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire
rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prior to
bidding, review architectural plans for last minute changes on locations of fire rated
walls. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct
connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
F. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
G. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct
connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.
H. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 -�
duct widths from duct take-off.
I. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. •
J. Provide opposed blade dampers as necessary to supplement multiple speed air
handling units to obtain scheduled total airflow.
K. Provide single blade balancing dampers at duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and
registers, unless included in diffuser or register schedule. If impractical due to space
limitations, an opposed blade damper shall be provided as an accessory to the
diffuser, grille or register.
END OF SECTION
15820-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15835
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof exhausters.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16155- Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International,
Inc.; 1999.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Ratings; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 1985 (ANSI/AMCA 210).
C. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal;
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; Current Edition.
D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 1996.
E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;
International,Movement and Control Association Inteational, In .; 1990.
F. UL 705- Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1994.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of
products specified in this section, with minimum' three years of documented
experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
15835-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
,m
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.
B. Loren Cook Company.
C. Substitutions: As allowed by Section 15001.
2.02 ROOF EXHAUSTERS
A. Product Requirements:
1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified
Rating Seal per AMCA 261.
2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified
Sound Rating Seal per AMCA 261.
3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with UL 705.
B. Fan Unit: V belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient
mounted motor; '/s inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base
to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.
C. Roof Curb: 8 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded
seams, built-in cant strips.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload
protected motor and wall mounted multiple speed switch.
E. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged
with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked, and line voltage motor drive,
power open, spring return.
F. Fans shall be selected to deliver scheduled airflow through a range of +/- 25% of
external static pressure indicated.
G. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed;
variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with
sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. . .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
15835-2 Rev. 6/01
low
C-668
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.
C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening.
D. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from in-line and ceiling exhauster fans and as
indicated.
END OF SECTION
15835-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Diffusers.
B. Registers/grilles.
C. Door grilles.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and
inlets.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ADC 1062: GRD - Test Code for Grilles, Registers & Diffusers; Air Diffusion Council;
1984.
B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 1999.
C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the, Performance of Air Outlets and
Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers,
Inc.; 1991.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements for,submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment requiredll, for this project. Review outlets
and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit
schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, pressure drop
dimensions, construction and noise level.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test
Code 1062 and ASHRAE Std 70.
15850-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of
products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented
experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Titus.
B. Substitutions as allowed by Section 15001.
2.02 ALL DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all diffusers, supply grilles and registers shall meet the
following:
1. Pressure drop shall fall between the range of 0.035 to 0.80 inches w.g., based on
airflows and neck size shown on plans.
2. Based on airflows and neck size shown on plans, noise criteria rating for corridor
applications shall be less than or equal to NC 35. All other applications shall be -�
less than or equal to NC 25.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, all return grilles shall meet the following:
1. Pressure drop shall be less than 0.035 inches w.g. for the indicated airflows,
based on neck size shown on plans.
2. Based on airflows and neck size shown on plans, noise criteria rating for corridor
applications shall be less than or equal to NC 35. All other applications shall be
less than or equal to NC 25.
2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with
sectorizing baffles where indicated.
B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling
frame.
C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
2.04 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS
15850-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face.
B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling
frame.
C. Fabrication: Steel with aluminum frame and baked enamel off-white finish. Material
shall be aluminum where scheduled.
2.05 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along
„ face of grille, two-way deflection.
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish.
2.06 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Fixed grilles of'/ x '/z x'/z inch grid openings similar to eggcrate pattern.
" B. Fabrication: Polystyrene plastic with off-white finish. Provide adaptors for gypsum
ceiling applications.
C. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
2.07 DOOR GRILLES
A. Where door grilles are not provided as a part of the door assembly, provide and install
the following, with size as indicated on plans:
1. Interior spaces
a. Type: V-shaped louvers of 20 gage thick steel, 1 inch deep on '/ inch
centers.
b. Frame: 20 gage steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on
both sides of door, with factory prime coat finish.
c. Titus CT-700 or equal
d. Coordinate with general contractor.
2. Exterior doors
a. Aluminum , 45 degree blade angle, minimum 42% free area, birdscreen.
b. Coordinate with general contractor.
c. Ruskin or equal. For 1-1/2"doors: ELF-15J For 2" doors: ELF-211.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
15850-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all required flashing/waterproofing for louver installations for a watertight
installation.
C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
D. Ensure exhaust outlets are located at least 10' away from air intakes. Adjust location
of outlet as necessary to maintain this separation.
E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,
unless included with diffuser on schedule.
F. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to provide door grilles and undercut doors
where called for.
G. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section
09900.
3.02 SCHEDULES '^
A. See drawings for schedules.
END OF SECTION
15850-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AABC MN-1 - National Standard for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning Systems; Associated Air Balance Council; 1989, Fifth Edition.
B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988.
C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 1998, Sixth Edition.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
? A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AAPC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or
NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental
Systems.
B. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented
experience.
C. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified (Test and Balance Engineer or
NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor experienced in
performance of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
FART 3 EXECUTION
).01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
15950-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. .�
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition
to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
B. Confirm the proper functions of all components as noted in the sequence of operations
including, but not limited to, interlocks, overrides, and damper positions & equipment
operations based on occupied and unoccupied modes of operation.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. alit
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make ^°
instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. ^
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of
design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent
of design.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that
such disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
15950-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified
settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. After
building occupation, recheck points or areas (up to 20%) as selected and witnessed
by the Engineer, at no additional costa
3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,
return, and exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitottube traverse of entire cross
sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from
` objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments
*" do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct
internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each
outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. (Make allowances for 50 percent
loading of filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
• J. Upon completion of test and balance work, insert all data into a complete type written
report and submit six copies of this report to the owner,(via the architect).
END OF SECTION
15950-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16050
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General Information on Electrical Installation not covered elsewhere. This section
applies to all other electrical sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of this contract, the term "Provide" shall mean to provide all labor,
material, transportation, and supervision required to furnish and install.
1.03 PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
A. This project includes all necessary labor and materials,including, but shall not be limited
to the following:
1. Temporary electric service and distribution for construction purpose.
2. Permanent building service entrance equipment and feeder distribution
3. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for all underground
electrical work.
4. Building interior panelboards and feeder and branch circuits to electrical devices,
lighting fixtures, and other electrically operated equipment.
5. Electrical equipment including disconnects, devices, switches, and light fixtures.
6. Empty conduits and outlets for telephone, computer, and cable T.V. systems.
7. Coordination with other contractors, the ARCHITECT and OWNER.
1.04 INTERPRETATION:
A. Specifications and Drawings shall be considered as supplementary to each other,
requiring materials and labor indicated, specified, or implied by either Specifications or
Drawings. Contradictions shall be presented to the Architect for resolution.
B. Interpretation of Specifications or Drawings, where deemed necessary, shall be made
only by the Architect.
1.05 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS:
A. The National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electric Safety Code and OSHA shall
establish the minimum requirements for installation, but in addition, all work shall also
comply with Local, State, County or Municipal Code requirements. If there is a conflict
16050-1 Rev. 6/01
ow
C-668
between the NEC and local, state, county, or municipal codes, conform to the more
stringent of the two. Similarly, if the local Authority Having Jurisdiction has not adopted
the latest revision of the NEC and is still using an earlier version, conform to the more
stringent of the two.
B. Be familiar with local Code requirements and local Utility Company Standards for
electrical service requirements, and make installation in accordance with such
requirements.
C. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a governing code or ordinance,
such conflict shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution.
Extra payment will not be allowed for Work required by code restrictions except through
written agreement with the Owner.
D. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final
payment is contingent upon delivery of such permits and certificates to the Architect. �►
1.06 SITE INSPECTION:
A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before submitting Bid.
Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and work
space limitations.
1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Refer to Section on Cutting and Patching.
B. Place all sleeves, inserts, conduit hangers, etc. as construction progresses to avoid any
unnecessary cutting of structural members. Cooperate with other Contractors in location
of electrical outlets that may conflict with location of other equipment.
C. Obtain authorization from the Architect for any necessary cutting of building structure to
facilitate installation of this work and do not proceed until authorization has been
received. Limit necessary cutting and patching to the minimum size required for
installation of conduit or apparatus.
1.08 SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to Submittals Section.
B. Submit Shop Drawings, catalog sheets, or other descriptive data with sufficient
information to establish design,quality and performance. Data shall describe apparatus,
equipment, panels, fixtures, and other items requiring descriptive literature. Provide
submittals as a single package including all required electrical items. Partial packages
will not be reviewed. Submittals items shall be in accordance with the individual
specification sections and include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
16050-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Service Equipment
2. Panelboards (shop drawings).
3. Disconnects and Fuses.
4. Switches and dimmers.
5. Wiring devices.
6. Wiring and Conduit where different from what is''specified.
7. Time switches and lighting contactors.
8. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) Equipment.
9. Light fixtures and Ballasts
1.09 MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. Collect and neatly retain maintenance and service data supplied with equipment
furnished and installed under this Contract until job completion, at which time deliver to
the Architect for inclusion in the Maintenance Manual! All such data must be properly
identified as for equipment served.
B. Keep one set of prints current of any changes or variations by marking prints in a legible
manner, and upon completion of project, deliver prints to the Architect. Do not make
changes without prior approval of the Architect.
1.10 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE:
A. Provide complete temporary system of power and: lighting wiring for use during
construction and for testing of equipment. Comply with OSHA and NEC including
personnel ground-fault protection requirements.
1.11 ELECTRIC SERVICE:
A. Primary medium voltage electrical service and service transformer(s) will be provided
by local Utility and arranged generally as indicated on the Drawings. Contact Utility in
advance and verify availability of electrical service as indicated.
B. Provide all labor, materials and equipment not provided by the Utility in accordance withUtilities'installation policies and procedures without additional cost. Should a significant
installation conflict occur, notify the Architect immediately for resolution before starting
any work. The contractor shall include any and all fejes associated with establishing
electrical power service in their bid.
1.12 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment not provided by the telephone company in
accordance with the telephone company's installation policies and procedures without
additional cost. Should a significant installation conflict occur, notify the Architect
immediately for resolution before starting any work. The'contractor shall include any and
all fees associated with establishing telephone service in their bid. Note that installation
16050-3 Rev. 6/01
,0
so
C-668
and connection of actual telephone and data cabling,both inside and outside of building,
is outside the scope of this contract unless the drawings indicate otherwise.
1.13 COORDINATION -GENERAL:
A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Review all project Drawings and coordinate all
work with General Contractor and different trades prior to installing any work so that
interferences between electrical work and ducts, piping, equipment, architectural and
structural work will be avoided. Do not install conduits, boxes and fittings in spaces
required for ductwork or piping.
B. Furnish all necessary offsets in raceways, fittings, etc., required to properly install work
so as to take up minimum space. Install all equipment to provide code required"working
space". Furnish and install all materials required to accomplish this without additional
cost. dw
C. In case interference develops, the Architect will decide which trade work must be
relocated regardless of which was installed first. Damage from interference or rework
caused by inadequate coordination with other trades shall be rectified without additional
cost.
D. Within 30 days following award of Contract, report to the Architect in writing all real or
potential errors,ambiguities and/or conflicts on electrical work or between trades. Those
reported after 30 days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be
resolved at the discretion of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting from progress of
work to the Architect immediately.
1.14 COORDINATION - ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL:
A. Unless specifically required otherwise, all motors, integral starters, control and
monitoring devices (including wire and conduit for control circuits), timers, relays, pilot
devices and other required control components for mechanical systems will be furnished
and installed under Division 15.
B. Unless specifically required otherwise, make all power wiring connections to all water
heaters, pumps, machinery, appliances, water coolers and other electrically-operated
equipment as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Furnish and install disconnect
switches, starters and protective devices as indicated on the Drawings,except for items W"
furnished with integral disconnect switches and/or starters. Coordinate the exact
location of receptacles, flexible conduit, and disconnects for mechanical and plumbing
equipment with the mechanical or plumbing contractor.
C. Review approved Shop Drawings and verify final electrical characteristics and wiring
before rough-in of power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data on approved •
Shop Drawings differs from contemplated design, make necessary adjustments to
wiring, disconnect, and branch-circuit protection for equipment actually installed.
16050-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.15 WORKING CLEARANCES:
A. Working clearances around electrical equipment requiring service shall comply with NEC
requirements. Coordinate and verify clearances from equipment and work furnished by
other trades. Should there be any apparent violations of clearance requirements, notify
the Architect before proceeding with connection or placement of equipment. Rework
caused by inadequate coordination shall be rectified at no extra cost.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS:
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. All materials used in this project shall be new, unless otherwise noted, and listed by the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as conforming to its standards where such standards
have been established. These materials shall bear the UL label.
B. Before purchasing any equipment, the contractor shall reconfirm the availability of the
project's voltage, phase (single phase versus three phase), and service configuration
with the electric utility.
I
C. Where materials,equipment,apparatus orother products are specified by manufacturer,
brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of
desired design or quality and shall be basis of Bid. Alternatives may be submitted to
Architect for consideration. See Substitutions section for more details.
D. Any equipment with an embedded microprocessor shall be Year 2000(Y2K)compliant.
Submit evidence from manufacturer that embedded microprocessors are Y2K compliant.
Pw
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANUP
A. After electrical installation,remove all rubbish,trash and debris from the site and dispose
of in an approved manner.
END OF SECTION
16050-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors, equipment grounding conductors, and bonding
to complete grounding system consisting of:
I. Metal underground water pipe, if available.
2. Effectively bonded and grounded metal frame of the building.
3. Concrete-encased electrode.
4. Rod electrodes.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, NFPA (1999).
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
„ B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with service
facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRODES
A. Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Length: 10 feet (3000 mm).
B. Concrete Encased Electrode:
16060-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Per NEC 250-50(c), provide concrete encased electrode. The electrode shall be
encased in at least 2 inches of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a
concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth. The electrode
shall consist of at least 20' of conductive steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less
than %" diameter or 20' of bare copper conductor not smaller than no. 4.
2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Wire: TW Stranded copper with green coding sized per NEC.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
Aft
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as •
required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
B. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to metal water pipe (if available),
ground rods, reinforcing steel in foundation footing,structural steel,and any other items
required by NEC Article 250 and local codes. Bond steel together.
C. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.
D. Bond equipment such as metallic housing and feeder metallic conduits to grounding
conductor. Use grounding bushings, on service conduit and at other points where
grounding continuity is broken.
E. Provide a bonding jumper for any equipment, motor, fixture or device to which current '
carrying conductors are connected that is not bonded directly to the grounded system.
Connect bonding jumper to approved lugs and grounding conduit bushings or clamps.
F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated grounding conductor
within each feeder and branch circuit raceway(sized per NEC Section 250). Terminate
each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. Metal raceways shall not be used as the sole
method of grounding.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16060-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
A. Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not
excessive (above 10 ohms). Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to
ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after
rainfall.
END OF SECTION
16060-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; ',National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, NFPA (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hangers, Supports,Anchors, and Fasteners-General: Corrosion-resistant materials of
size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight
of wire in conduit.
B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.
2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-
actuated anchors, or preset inserts.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset
PIP fasteners, or welded fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
16070-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow
wall fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and install anchors,fasteners,and supports in accordance with NECA"Standard
of Installation".
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members.
B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance
with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors
D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and •
panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall.
E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards ,
recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
16070-2 Rev. 6/01
A
a•
low
C-668
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B. Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch (3 mm) letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch (6 mm) letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels(for Power Outlets): Embossed adhesive tape,With 1/8 inch (3 mm)black letters
on clear background. Use only for identification of appliances and equipment with their
own branch circuits and for dedicated computer circuits. Label outlet with name of load,
panel and circuit number.
16075-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws.
C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboards that are recessed in
finished locations.
END OF SECTION
16075-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
B. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with
service facilities within 100 miles (160 km) of Project.
C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS
A. Use only building wire with Type THWN/THHN (dual rated) or XHHW insulation in
raceway (ground wires may be Type TW or THW). Wire shall be color coded per the
NEC and as follows:
1. 208/120V, 3 Phase System: Black, Red, Blue with White Neutral and Green
Ground
B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits#8 AWG and smaller. Use stranded
conductors for feeders and branch circuits#6 AWG and larger.
i
C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
16123-1 Rev. 6/01
lil
C-668
D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet(25
M).
G. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Wire shall be copper unless indicated otherwise.
2.02 BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: Thermoplastic material rated 90 degrees C.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. ,
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
B. Wire and cable routing indicated is intended to be diagrammatic.
C. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown,determine exact
routing and lengths required.
D. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft(3000
mm) of location shown.
E. No wiring shall be installed until the required raceway system, including junction, outlet
and device boxes is completed. Install wiring before painting begins and protect against
being painted.
F. Branch circuit sizes are noted on the Drawings and must be continuous without
reduction in size throughout their length except where connecting to fixtures or devices.
16123-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
G. Branch circuit wire sizes shall be increased as required where long runs will cause
excessive voltage drop per NEC.
H. Wire circuits as described or indicated on the Drawings to achieve a connected load as
scheduled. Should any change be necessary, it must be brought to the Architect's
attention.
I. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."
J. Use wiring methods indicated
K. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
L. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment,'and panelboards.
N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
O. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
P. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of
insulation rating of conductor.
Q. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices
„ and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B. Test wiring rated 600 volts and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds
exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 4 AWG and larger diameter
using an instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct
reading of resistance. Minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.
END OF SECTION
16123-3 Rev. 6/01
I
C-668
SECTION 16131
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
„ A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02 - REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit--Zinc
Coated; 1995.
B. ANSI C80.3-American National Standard Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing—
Zinc Coated; 1995.
C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard Specification for Rigid Aluminum Conduit;
1995.
D. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993.
F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
1989.
G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80);
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1990.
H. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1990.
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
16131-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS "
A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise specified. This minimum size °
does not apply to flexible conduit.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. ,
2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA RN 1;rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating,20 mil(0.05 mm)
thick.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to
match conduit.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
16131-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.07 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA Standard of',Installation.
B. All wiring shall be in conduit. Routing of conduit shown on drawings is intended to be
diagrammatic and where changes are necessary as,a result of structural conditions,
apparatus, or other causes, routing shall be changed to meet conditions. Conduit risers
and offsets are not indicated on Drawings, but are intended to be installed as required.
Conduit shall be selected according to location and code requirements.
C. EMT shall be used in the building interior up to 2"in diameter unless otherwise indicated.
EMT conduit shall not be used in wet or hazardous locations, below grade or in
concrete.
D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to motors,
appliances and vibrating equipment and shall be a maximum of six feet in length(regular
flexible metal conduit may be used for final connection to interior light fixtures).
E. Flexible Metal Conduit or MC Cable or shall only be used for final connection to
equipment with a maximum length of six feet. Nonmetallic flex conduit or tubing shall
not be used.
F. Galvanized rigid conduit shall be used for incoming feeder to all the panels.
G. Underground conduit or conduit in concrete shall be PVC Schedule 40 (Type-EPC) or
PVC coated rigid steel unless indicated otherwise. Conduit under slab-on-grade shall
be buried at least 12"below the vapor barrier. Per the Standard Building Code, conduit
16131-3 Rev. 6101
C-668
embedded in concrete slabs,walls, or beams shall not have an outside dimension more
than one-third the overall thickness of the concrete in which they are imbedded. Conduit
shall not be run lengthwise in footings. Transitions to aboveground shall be made with
PVC coated rigid steel or with rigid steel conduit coated with 2 coats of asphaltic mastic.
PVC conduit shall not be used aboveground.
H. Per NEC paragraph 300-5 (d) (1999 edition), provide warning tape or ribbon 12"above
a service lateral conduit that is not encased in concrete.
I. All metallic conduit terminating in outlet, junction or pull boxes and cabinets must
terminate with bushing and double locknuts except exposed cast boxes,where they may
be omitted. Conduit sizes 1-1/4" and above shall have insulating fiber bushings with
double locknuts. Grounding type bushings must be used at points where grounding
continuity is broken and at service entrance equipment. EMT conduit shall have
compression type fittings (set screw connectors are not acceptable).
J. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
K. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,
clevis hangers, and split hangers.
L. Group related conduits;support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; ,
provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
M. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section
16070.
N. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports.
O. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
P. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
Q. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Do not run conduit exposed
in occupied areas unless noted otherwise.
R. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
S. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
T. Do not cross conduits in slab.
U. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
16131-4 Rev. 6101
w.
C-668
V. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
W. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
X. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Y. For conduit installed in floors that are in place before conduit is installed, provide
waterproof sleeve.
Z. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit
bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot
bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size.
AA. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
AB. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit
crosses seismic and expansion joints complete with copper bonding jumper.
AC. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
AD. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
AE. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16060.
AF. Per the Standard Building Code, in wooden load-bearing and exterior walls, do not cut
or notch any wooden framing member to a depth exceeding 25 percent of its width. For
wooden nonload-bearing walls, do not cut or notch any wooden framing member to a
depth exceeding 40 percent of its width.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements using
materials and methods listed as part of UL system.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible.
Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation
method with roofing installation.
END OF SECTION
16131-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16138
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Floor boxes.
C. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993.
C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996,
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment '(1000 Volts Maximum); National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes:i Rated for weight of equipment
supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.
16138-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
3. Boxes for installation in concrete block wall construction shall be gang type, 3-1/2"
deep for switch devices and 4" square by 1-1/2" deep, with 1-1/4" single and two
gang square corner extension covers for receptacle and junction purposes. Boxes
for installation in brick wall construction shall be gang type, 3-1/2" deep. Boxes
installed in plastered walls shall be 4" square by 1-1/2" deep, with 3/4" single and
two gang plaster covers. All boxes shall have internal mounting ears or threaded
tappings.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.
2.02 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep.
B. Material: Cast metal. .�
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. Boxes shall be 1 1/2" deep
minimum. Boxes to which fixtures are installed shall have studs and straps to support
fixture weight.
B. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet steel and
fitted with screw covers held in place with corrosion resistant machine screws.
C. Provide boxes where noted on Drawings or where necessary to facilitate conductor
pulling and splicing. Splicing of conductors is to be avoided as much as possible with
continuous lengths being preferred. Box sizes shall conform to sizes required by NEC
or as indicated on the Drawings (if larger than required by NEC).
D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted
junction box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
E. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,Type 6,outside flanged, recessed cover box for
flush mounting:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.
F. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes:
16138-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm)cable entrance at center bottom
of each side.
2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation."
B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices,taps,wire pulling,
equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16155.
D. Eliectrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet (3 m) if required to accommodate intended
purpose.
E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas
only.
H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction.boxes no more than 6 inches(150
mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches, and backsplashes.
K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats, and similar devices.
M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
Q,
16138-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150
mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated
walls.
P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to
allow for surface finish thickness.
Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
U. Support boxes independently of conduit. .�
V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional
box. ,
W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are
acceptable for other installations.
Z. Set floor boxes level.
AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast
metal box in other locations.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.04 CLEANING N
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
16138-4 Rev. 6101
C-668
B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
IMP
16138-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Wall dimmers.
C. Receptacles.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1983 (R1989).
C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1988.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,colors,
and configurations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
16140-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS.
A. All devices shall be specification grade and shall be the product of one manufacturer
throughout the project except as otherwise noted.
2.02 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches: NEMA WD 1, Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, quiet type
with side wire terminals. Switches shall be single or multi-pole as indicated on the
Drawings. Provide Leviton Decora Switches, or equal, if indicated on drawings.
1. Body and Handle: plastic with toggle handle unless otherwise indicated. Color shall "*
be as determined by owner.
2. Ratings:
a. Voltage: 120 -277 volts, AC. •
b. Current: 20 amperes.
2.03 WALL DIMMERS
A. Wall Dimmers: NEMA WD 1; Semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps, Type as
indicated on drawings.
1. Body and Handle: plastic with linear slide unless otherwise indicated. Color as
determined by owner. -
2. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings; 600 watts minimum.
B. Accessory Wall Switches: Match dimmer appearance.
2.04 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles: NEMA WD 1, Heavy duty.
1. Duplex receptacles shall be straight blade, grounding type, with side wiring
terminals. Conductors shall be connected to all receptacles using screws (not
spring connectors).
2. Device Body: plastic unless otherwise indicated. Color as determined by owner.
3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
B. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 - 20.
C. Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
D. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter
to meet regulatory requirements. Also,provide GFCI receptacles where indicated. GFCI
type receptacles shall have "test" and "reset" buttons. ,
16140-2 Rev. 6/01
„s
C-668
E. Weather proof receptacles shall be in a cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof,
cast-metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps
with a spring-hinged flap. Weatherproof receptacles shall be UL listed for use in "wet
locations with plug in use” and shall be GFCI rated.
F. Floor-mounted receptacles shall have a brass plate and cover, unless noted otherwise.
G. Special purpose outlets shall be as indicated on the Drawings and have matching cover
plates.
2.05 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plates: smooth plastic unlessotherwise indicated. Color as
determined by owner.
B. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
16140-3 Rev. 6101
C-668
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for
ganging as instructed by manufacturer. For dimmers associated with electronic
ballasts, provide separate box and plate (do not combine with other switches).
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
H. Do not cut cover plate.
I. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
J. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install wall switch 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. .�
B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches (150 mm) above counter.
D. Install dimmer 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01400.
B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
16140-4 Rev. 6/01
r.•
C-668
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
16140-5 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16155
EQUIPMENT WIRING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1983 (R1989).
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1988.
C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and .
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnishedunder other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
16155-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Disconnect Switches: As follows and and in individual equipment sections:
1. Safety switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, heavy duty type in sheet steel
enclosure, except as required for rain tight installations, with door cover interlock.
Provide fused type safety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings or
as required by Code. Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses,
unless indicated otherwise.
B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 16140.
C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 16131.
D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 16123.
E. Boxes: As specified in Section 16138.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturers instructions.
B. Make all final power feed connections to starters and/or motorized equipment installed
by Heating and Air Conditioning and Plumbing Contractors as indicated or required.
Refer to Electrical Sections of other Contractors' Specifications for further information.
C. For air handling equipment with separate"field-installed"heater unit, provide fuse block
with fuses,wiring and power connections for fan motor tapped to unit disconnect switch.
D. Verify all equipment for service and characteristics provided prior to rough-in and
connection. Provide a grounding conductor for all equipment connected with flexible
conduit and bond to conduit system and metallic frame of equipment.
E. Be responsible for securing and installing proper insulated conductors required for
equipment of higher temperature range beyond that of specified branch circuit type.
16155-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
F. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible metal conduit. Use liquidtight
flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations and for all
motors and vibrating equipment.
G. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
H. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
I. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
J. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
K. Install disconnect switches,controllers,control stations, and control devices to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
L. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
AW
M. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
END OF SECTION
16155-3 Rev. 6101
C-668
SECTION 16411
OW ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed circuit breakers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; iNational Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
16411-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation.
B. GE Company.
C. Square D Company.
D. Siemens Corporation.
2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS '*
A. Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Enclosures: NEMA AB 1, Type 3R.
1. Finish: Manufacturers standard enamel finish, gray color.
B. Provide accessories as scheduled to NEMA AB 1.
C. Provide products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where so applied.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
B. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section
16070.
C. Height: 5 feet (1.6 M) to operating handle.
D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test each circuit breaker to NEMA AB 1.
B. Inspect each circuit breaker visually.
16411-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker.
D. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position.
E. For circuit breakers 600A or larger, determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent
condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. Include description of testing
and results in test report.
END OF SECTION
16411-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16412
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
�. PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
" A. Fusible switches.
B. Nonfusible switches.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16491 - Fuses.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1986.
C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996.
D. NETA STD ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999.
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with
service facilities within 100 miles (160 km) of Project.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
16412-1 Rev. 6101
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation.
B. GE Company.
C. Square D Company.
D. Siemens Corporation.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife
switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch
in ON position. „
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife
switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch
in ON position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. on
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and
size installed.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16412-2 Rev. 6/01
ate•
C-668
A. Visually and mechanically confirm that safety switch is working.
B. For switches rated 200A and greater, inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD
ATS, except Section 4.
C. For switches rated 200A and greater, perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD
ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION
16412-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16443
PANELBOARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Power distribution panelboards.
B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 1993.
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993.
C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1995.
D. NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
1996.
E. NETA STD ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999.
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, Circuit breaker and fusible switch
arrangement and sizes.
B. Provide catalog data for Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Devices.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
16443-1 Rev. 6/01
I
C-668
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS WM
A. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation.
B. GE Company.
C. Square D Company.
D. Siemens Corporation.
2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on circuit breakers with integral thermal
and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type
HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
F. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with
flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
G. Provide blank covers as necessary to cover unused spaces in panelboard. Blank covers
shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of the panelboard and intended for this
purpose.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each
panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
16443-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on,type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Plug-in circuit breakers are not
acceptable.
1. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 240 volt and less
panelboards, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 480 volt panelboards.
G. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface Mount as indicated on drawings. Cabinet front with
concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed
imp alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
H. Provide blank covers as necessary to cover unused spaces in panelboard. Blank covers
shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of the panelboard and intended for this
purpose.
O„ 2.04 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION.
A. Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)where indicated on the Drawings
The TVSS device shall be rated for at least 100KA surge current per phase. Maximum
UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage shall be 400 Volts (line to neutral, neutral to
ground and line to ground) for 120/208V or 1201240V systems and 800 Volts (line to
neutral, neutral to ground and line to ground) for a'277/480V system. The TVSS
device shall be UL listed and shall meet all criteria of UL 1449, current edition.
Additionally, the device shall contain visual fault indication. The TVSS device shall be
installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,and shall be installed as
close as possible to the incoming panel feeder using a spare 30 Amp circuit breaker.
40 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
00
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB '1.1 and the NECA Standard of
Installation.
pa
B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
two C. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet
(1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.
16443-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075.
G. For panels installed flush in finished walls, provide spare conduits out of each recessed
panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE.
1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch (DN27). "
H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to NEC.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each circuit breaker visually. •
B. Perform serveral mechanical on-off operations for each circuit breaker.
C. For circuit breakers 600A and larger, Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD
ATS, except Section 4.
D. For circuit breakers 600A and larger, perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD
ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit breakers.
E. For circuit breakers 600A and larger, determine that circuit breaker will trip on
overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. Include
description of testing and results in test report.
END OF SECTION
16443-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16491
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1986.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with
service facilities within 100 miles (160 km) of Project.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FUSES - GENERAL
A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
C. Provide 'Rejection"type fuseholders for all Class R fuses
D. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).
E. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
.. F. Power Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).
16491-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
G. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
H. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
I. Lighting Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay.
J. Lighting Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
K. Other Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: L time delay.
L. Other Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
M. Motor Branch Circuits: Class L time delay.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION
16491-2 Rev. 6/01
a
C-668
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINARIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Emergency lighting units.
C. Exit signs.
D. Ballasts.
E. Lamps.
F. Luminaire accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.379 -American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps --
Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994.
B. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts;
1985 (R1992).
C. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and
Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 1992.
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1988.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
F. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association; 1997.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data (including ballasts and lighting contactors): Provide dimensions, ratings,
and performance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
16510-1 Rev. 6/01
.xe
C-668
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one replacement lamp for each lamp type.
•m
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. Confirm that the
fixtures scheduled are the correct, voltage, wattage, size and mounting type and are
listed for location used (i.e. damp or wet locations) before ordering fixtures, ballasts,
and lamps. For substitutions, see section 16050.
B. Although not specifically shown or specified, all light fixtures shall be provided with all
necessary optional accessories and mounting hardware for installation as indicated or
required.
C. Provide insulated ceiling (i.c.) rated fixtures where recessed incandescent, compact
fluorescent, or low voltage light fixtures come into direct contact with insulation.
2.02 BALLASTS AND CONTROL UNITS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts:
1. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be as noted on Fixture Schedule. Energy
efficient type ballasts shall be specifically approved for operation with the specified ""
lamps. Electronic ballasts shall have low total harmonic distortion (less than or
equal to 20 percent)to avoid excessive harmonics and overloading of neutrals. All
ballasts shall have an A noise rating.
2. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID)Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast,suitable
for lamp specified.
1. Ballast for HID fixtures shall be high power factor type selected for type and wattage
of lamp supplied. All ballasts shall have an A noise rating. ,
2. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
16510-2 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2.03 LAMPS
A. Reflector Lamps: Beam patterns in accordance with ANSI C78.379.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel
hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling
framing.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building
lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E. Support fixtures(2 x 4 foot and smaller)to be recessed in readily removable tile ceilings
(lay-in type) from the T-bar tile support and connect to remote mounted 4" square
(minimum size, conform to NEC)junction boxes with approved six foot long, 3/8"flexible
conduit "fixture whip" with grounding conductor bonded between conduit system and
fixture.
F. Connect single-connected fixtures,surface orstem hung,with heat resistant fixture wire.
Connect multiple-connected fluorescent fixtures, surface or stem hung,with type THHN
heat resistant thermoplastic wire of a size indicated for branch circuit.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
H: Provide sloped ceiling adaptors and all other required hardware as necessary to properly
install ceiling mounted light fixtures in sloped ceilings.
I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as
indicated on Drawings.
J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16138
using flexible conduit.
L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
16510-3 Rev. 6/01
II,
C-668
M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection ow
and operation.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated.
B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. Also remove all instruction tags.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE- SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
16510-4 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16520
EXTERIOR LUMINARIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.379 -American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps —
Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994.
B. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts;
1985 (R1992).
± ° C. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and
Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)''; 1992.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association (1999).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data(including photocells,timers,and lighting contactors): Provide dimensions,
ratings, and performance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
16520-1 Rev. 6/01
II
C-668
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. For substitions,
see Section 16050. Confirm mounting, type, voltage and wattage is correct before
ordering.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast,
suitable for lamps specified.
1. Provide low-temperature ballast suitable for lamps specified.
2. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
B. High Intensity Discharge(HID)Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast,suitable
for lamp specified.
1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
2.03 TIME-SWITCHES AND OTHER LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Time switch controls shall be as noted on the Drawings and shall be multi-pole, single
throw, rated 20 amperes per pole (minimum),with astronomic dial properly selected for
latitude of installation and 16 hour(minimum)spring reserve cavy-over in event of power
failure. Time switch shall be in NEMA 3R surface mounted enclosure unless otherwise ..,
noted.
B. Lighting contactors shall be meet NEMA ICS and shall be electrically held. Contacts
shall be rated as indicated.
C. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated
for voltage of fixtures used with a minimum of 240 volts ac. Switch shall tum on at or
below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental
switching from transient light sources.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.
16520-2 Rev. 6/01
P
C-668
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper
connections and operation.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.05 SCHEDULE- SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
16520-3 Rev. 6/01
C-668
SECTION 16721
TELEPHONE SERVICE, PATHWAYS, AND WIRING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Telephone service entrance raceway.
B. Equipment and terminal backboards.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. TIA/EIA-569-A-Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces; Telecommunications Industry Association; 1997 (ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A).
B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ( 1999).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with telephone utility's rules and regulations and NFPA 70.
B. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TELEPHONE SERVICE AND PATHWAYS
A. Telephone Service Entrance Pathway: Schedule 40 PVC from point of telephone utility
connection at property line (or where directed by local telephone company)to building
service at the telephone backboard.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Telephone Termination Backboards: Plywood.
1. Size: As indicated.
2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
16721-1 Rev. 6/01
C-668
2.03 TELEPHONE WIRE AND CABLE
A. Premises Wiring: By Owner. ,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Finish paint termination backboards with durable gray enamel.
B. Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section 16070.
C. Install termination backboards plumb,and attach securely to building wall at each comer.
D. Install conduits, outlet boxes, computer box and backboard as shown on the Drawings.
Conduit shall be as previously specified,with 3/4 as the minimum size unless otherwise
indicated. Provide all conduits with pull-wire. Provide insulated bushings at all conduit
terminations. Provide slotted channels at telephone backboard to support and align
conduit.
E. Wall outlets shall be 4" square by 1-1/2" deep, with single gang extension covers and
covered with specified plates with 3/8" grommets.
F. Coordinate with local Telephone Company and verify exact routing and termination point
of building telephone service entry conduits shown on the Drawings.
G. Install pullwire in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet(3 m)in length or containing
a bend.
END OF SECTION
16721-2 Rev. 6/01